Renault Megane Coupe Drivers Handbook

2015-04-28

: Renault Renault-Megane-Coupe-Drivers-Handbook-715858 renault-megane-coupe-drivers-handbook-715858 renault pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 254 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

DRIVER’S HANDBOOK

MEGANE

Photo credit: Total/DPPI Imacom group

ELF has developed a complete range of lubricants for RENAULT:

f engine oils

f manual and automatic gearbox oils

Benefiting from the research applied to Formula 1,

lubricants are very high-tech products.

Updated with the help of RENAULT’s technical

teams, this range is perfectly compatible with the

specific features of the brand’s vehicles.

f ELF lubricants enhance

your vehicle’s performance significantly.

RENAULT recommends approved ELF lubricants for oil changes and top-ups.

Contact your RENAULT Dealer or visit www.lubrifiants.elf.com

Warning: to ensure the engine operates optimally, the use

of a lubricant may be restricted to certain vehicles. Please

refer to your maintenance document.

RENAULT recommends ELF

Une marque de

0.1

ENG_UD19396_3

Bienvenue (X35 - X44 - X45 - X73 - X81 - J81 - X84 - X85 - B85 - C85 - S85 - X91 - X70 - X76 - X83 - X61 - TEST - X77 ph2 - K85 - X95 - X33 - X43 - X38 - X65 PH5 - ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_0

Translated from French. Copying or translation, in part or in full, is forbidden unless prior written permission has been obtained from the vehicle manu-

facturer.

This Driver’s Handbook contains the information necessary:

– for you to familiarise yourself with your vehicle, to use it to its best advantage and to benefit fully from the all the functions and

the technical developments it incorporates.

– to ensure that it always gives the best performance by following the simple, but comprehensive advice concerning regular main-

tenance.

– to enable you to deal quickly with minor faults not requiring specialist attention.

It is well worth taking a few minutes to read this handbook to familiarise yourself with the information and guidelines it contains

about the vehicle and its functions and new features. If certain points are still unclear, our Network technicians will be only too

pleased to provide you with any additional information.

The following symbol will help you when reading this handbook:

Welcome to your new vehicle

The descriptions of the models given in this handbook are based on the technical specifications at the time of writing. This hand-

book covers all items of equipment (both standard and optional) available for these models but whether or not these are

fitted to the vehicle depends on the version, options selected and the country where the vehicle is sold.

This handbook may also contain information about items of equipment to be introduced later in the model year.

Throughout the manual, the “approved Dealer” is your RENAULT Dealer.

To indicate a hazard, danger or safety recommendation.

Enjoy driving your new vehicle.

0.2

ENG_UD9525_5

Filler NU (X06 - C06 - S06 - X35 - L35 - X44 - C44 - G44 - X45 - H45 - X65 - L65 - S65 - X73 - B73 - X74 - B74 - K74 - X77 - J77 - F77 - R77 - X81 - J81 - X84 - B84 - C84 ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_0

0.3

ENG_UD6256_1

Sommaire Général (X95 - B95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_0

Getting to know your vehicle ...............................

Driving ...................................................................

Your comfort .........................................................

Maintenance .........................................................

Practical advice ....................................................

Technical specifications ......................................

Alphabetical index ...............................................

Sections

CONTENTS

0.4

ENG_UD9525_5

Filler NU (X06 - C06 - S06 - X35 - L35 - X44 - C44 - G44 - X45 - H45 - X65 - L65 - S65 - X73 - B73 - X74 - B74 - K74 - X77 - J77 - F77 - R77 - X81 - J81 - X84 - B84 - C84 ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_0

1.1

ENG_UD26110_2

Sommaire 1 (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle

RENAULT cards: general information, use, deadlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2

Doors ......................................................................... 1.10

Automatic locking of opening elements when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14

Headrests - Seats ............................................................... 1.15

Seats ......................................................................... 1.17

Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22

Additional methods of restraint: ..................................................... 1.25

to the front seat belts ....................................................... 1.25

to the rear seat belts ....................................................... 1.29

side protection ............................................................ 1.30

Child safety: general information .................................................... 1.32

choosing a child seat mounting ............................................... 1.35

fitting a child seat .......................................................... 1.37

deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.48

Steering wheel .................................................................. 1.51

Power-assisted steering .......................................................... 1.51

Driving position ................................................................. 1.52

Control instruments .............................................................. 1.56

on-board computer ......................................................... 1.62

vehicle settings customisation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.72

Clock and exterior temperature ..................................................... 1.73

Rear-view mirrors ............................................................... 1.74

Audible and visual signals ......................................................... 1.75

Exterior lighting and signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.76

Headlight beam adjustment ........................................................ 1.80

Windscreen washers/wipers ....................................................... 1.81

Fuel tank (filling with fuel) ......................................................... 1.84

locking the doors ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

emergency key ..................................... (up to the end of the DU)

child safety.............................................................(current page)

children (safety) ..................................................... (current page)

RENAULT card

use ..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.2

ENG_UD21469_2

Cartes RENAULT : généralités (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Range of the RENAULT card

This varies according to the surround-

ings. It is important to make sure when

handling the RENAULT card that you

do not lock or unlock the doors by inad-

vertently pressing the buttons.

RENAULT cards: General information, use, deadlocking

RENAULT CARDS: general information (1/2)

1 Unlocking the doors and tailgate.

2 Locking all doors and tailgate.

3 Switching on the lighting remotely.

4 Unlocking/locking the tailgate

5 Integrated key.

Special note

The RENAULT “SERVICE” card, on

equipped vehicles, can be identified

by the word “SERVICE” engraved on

the card. Refer to the information on

the RENAULT “SERVICE” card in sec-

tion 1.

The RENAULT card is used

for:

– locking/unlocking the doors and tail-

gate (doors, tailgate) and the fuel

filler flap (see the following pages);

– switching on the vehicle lighting re-

motely (refer to the following pages);

– depending on the vehicle, automati-

cally closing the electric windows

and sunroof remotely (see the infor-

mation on “Electric windows/Electric

sunroof” in Section 3);

– starting the engine; refer to the in-

formation on “Starting the engine” in

Section 2.

Battery life

Make sure that the correct battery type

is being used, and that the battery is in

good condition and inserted correctly.

Its service life is approximately two

years: replace it when the message

“Keycard battery low” appears on the

instrument panel (refer to the informa-

tion on the “RENAULT card: battery" in

section 5).

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave your vehicle

with the RENAULT card

inside and never leave a

child (or a pet) unsupervised, even

for a short while.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or by locking the

doors.

Risk of serious injury.

1 2 3

When the battery is flat, you can

still lock/unlock and start your ve-

hicle. Refer to the information on

“Locking/unlocking the doors” in

Section 1 and “Starting the engine”

in Section 2.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.3

ENG_UD21469_2

Cartes RENAULT : généralités (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

RENAULT CARDS: general information (2/2)

Access to key 5

Press button 6 and pull on key 5 then

release the button.

Using the key

Refer to the information on “Locking/

unlocking the doors”.

Once you have accessed the vehicle

using the integrated key, replace it

in its housing in the RENAULT card,

then insert the RENAULT card into

the card reader to start the vehicle.

Integrated key 5

The integrated key is used to lock or

unlock the front left-hand door if the

RENAULT card does not work:

– when the RENAULT card battery is

drained, flat battery, etc.

– use of devices using the same fre-

quency as the card;

– if the vehicle is located in a zone of

high electromagnetic radiation;

Replacement: need for an

additional RENAULT Card

If you lose your RENAULT card or

require another, you can obtain one

from an approved dealer.

If a RENAULT card is replaced, it

will be necessary to take the vehi-

cle and all of its RENAULT cards

to an approved dealer to initialise

the system.

You may use up to four RENAULT

cards per vehicle.

Advice

Avoid leaving the card in hot, cold or

humid areas.

Do not keep the RENAULT card in

a place where it could be bent or

damaged accidentally, such as in a

back pocket of a garment.

locking the doors ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

RENAULT card

use ..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.4

ENG_UD18638_3

Cartes RENAULT à télécommande : utilisation (X95 - B95 - D95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

REMOTE CONTROL RENAULT CARD: use

Unlocking the doors and

tailgate

Press button 1.

The hazard warning lights flash once

to indicate that the doors have been un-

locked.

When unlocking is only active for the

driver’s door, (refer to the information

on the “vehicle settings customisation

menu” in Section 1):

– pressing button 1 unlocks only the

driver’s door and the fuel filler flap;

– pressing button 1 twice unlocks all

the doors and the tailgate.

Locking the doors and

luggage compartment

Press the locking button 2. The hazard

warning lights flash twice to indicate

that the doors have locked. If a door

or the luggage compartment is open

or not properly shut, or if a RENAULT

card is still in the reader, the doors and

luggage compartment lock then quickly

unlock and the hazard warning lights

do not flash.

Unlocking/locking the

luggage compartment only

Press button 4 to unlock/lock the lug-

gage compartment.

RENAULT card not detected

alarm

If a door is opened when the engine

is running and the card is not in the

reader, the message “Keycard not de-

tected” and a beep will warn you of this.

The warning disappears when the card

is inserted in the reader again.

Distance lighting function

The dipped beam headlights, indicator

lights and interior lights come on for ap-

proximately 30 seconds when button 3

is pressed. This can be used, for exam-

ple, to identify the vehicle from a dis-

tance when parked in a car park.

Note: pressing button 3 again switches

off the lighting.

The card buttons are deactivated

when the engine is running.

The flashing status of the hazard

warning lights informs you of the ve-

hicle status:

– one flash indicates that the vehi-

cle is completely unlocked;

– two flashes indicate that the ve-

hicle is completely locked.

If the vehicle has been unlocked

but neither the doors or tailgate are

open, it locks again automatically

after two minutes.

locking the doors ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

RENAULT card

use ..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.5

ENG_UD14783_3

Carte RENAULT en mode mains libres (X95 - B95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

HANDS-FREE RENAULT CARD: use (1/3)

Use

On equipped vehicles, in addition to

the functions of the remote control

RENAULT card, it can be used to lock/

unlock without using the RENAULT

card, when it is in access zone 1.

Note: ensure that the RENAULT card

is not in contact with other electronic

equipment (computer, PDA, phone,

etc.) as this could hinder its operation.

Unlocking the vehicle

With the RENAULT card in zone 1,

place your hand on a door handle 2: the

vehicle will unlock (in some cases, you

may need to pull door handle 2 twice to

unlock the vehicle and open the door).

Pressing the button 3 also unlocks all

the doors and the tailgate.

The hazard warning lights flash once

to indicate that the doors have been un-

locked.

child safety.............................................................(current page)

children (safety) ..................................................... (current page)

1.6

ENG_UD14783_3

Carte RENAULT en mode mains libres (X95 - B95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

HANDS-FREE RENAULT CARD: use (2/3)

Locking the vehicle

There are three ways to lock the vehi-

cle: remotely, using button 4, or using

the RENAULT card.

Remote locking

With the RENAULT card on you, and

doors and tailgate closed, move away

from the vehicle: it will lock automati-

cally once you have left zone 1.

Note: the distance at which the vehicle

locks depends on the surroundings.

The hazard warning lights flash twice

and a beep sounds to indicate that the

doors have locked.

The beep may be switched off. Consult

an approved Dealer.

If a door or the tailgate is open or not

properly shut, or a card is in the passen-

ger compartment (or the card reader)

the vehicle will not lock. In this situa-

tion, no beep sounds and the hazard

warning lights do not flash.

Locking using button 4

With the doors and luggage compart-

ment closed, press button 4 on the driv-

er’s door handle. The vehicle will lock.

If a door or the tailgate is open or not

closed properly, the vehicle will quickly

lock/unlock.

Note: a RENAULT card must be within

the vehicle's access zone (zone 1) to

be able to lock the vehicle using the

button.

Special note:

If you wish to check that the doors are

locked after locking using button 4, you

have approximately three seconds to

try the door handles without unlocking

them.

After this delay, the hands-free mode

is activated once again and any move-

ment of a handle will unlock the vehicle.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.7

ENG_UD14783_3

Carte RENAULT en mode mains libres (X95 - B95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

With the engine running, if after

having opened and closed a door the

card is no longer in the passenger com-

partment, the message Keycard not de-

tected (accompanied by a beep when

the speed exceeds a certain level)

warns you that the card is no longer

in the vehicle. This avoids you driving

away after having dropped off a pas-

senger who has the card, for example.

The warning disappears when the card

is detected again.

HANDS-FREE RENAULT CARD: use (3/3)

Locking the vehicle

(continued)

Locking using the RENAULT card

With the doors and luggage compart-

ment closed, press button 5: the vehi-

cle will lock.

The hazard warning lights flash twice

to indicate that the doors have locked.

Note: the maximum distance at which

the vehicle locks depends on the sur-

roundings.

Special note:

The vehicle will not lock if:

– a door or the tailgate is open or not

properly closed;

– a card is still in zone 6 (or in the card

reader) and no other card is in the

external detection zone.

After locking/unlocking the vehicle

or the luggage compartment only

using the buttons on the RENAULT

card, remote locking and unlocking

in hands-free mode are deactivated.

To reactivate the “hands-free” mode:

restart the vehicle.

central door locking ..............................(up to the end of the DU)

doors/tailgate ........................................ (up to the end of the DU)

locking the doors ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

RENAULT card

use ..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

deadlocking the doors ........................................... (current page)

1.8

ENG_UD10814_2

Cartes RENAULT : super-condamnation (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

To deactivate deadlocking

Unlock the vehicle using button 1 on

the RENAULT card.

The hazard warning lights flash once to

indicate that the doors have been un-

locked.

Never use deadlocking if

someone is still inside the

vehicle.

To activate deadlocking

You can choose between two deadlock-

ing activation modes:

– press button 2 twice in quick succes-

sion;

– or, press the button on the driver’s

door handle 3 twice in quick succes-

sion.

The hazard warning lights flash five

times to indicate locking.

If the vehicle is equipped with a dead-

locking function, this allows you to lock

the opening elements and to prevent

the doors from being unlocked using

the interior handles (for example, by

breaking the window and then trying to

open the door from the inside).

RENAULT CARD: deadlocking

Activating deadlocking also re-

motely closes the windows and/or

the electric sunroof, on equipped

vehicles.

After activating the deadlocking

function using button 2, remote

locking and unlocking in hands-free

mode are deactivated.

To reactivate the “hands-free” mode:

restart the vehicle.

locking the doors ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

RENAULT card

use ..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.9

ENG_UD18962_2

Carte RENAULT en mode restreint (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

RENAULT CARD “SERVICE”

If the vehicle is equipped with this

card, it can be identified by the word

“SERVICE” engraved on the card.

In certain situations, you may wish to

entrust your vehicle to a third party

(parking valet, mechanic, etc.) whilst

restricting its operation.

The RENAULT “SERVICE” card ena-

bles the vehicle to be locked but only

allows the driver's door to be unlocked

and the engine to be started.

Activation of the “SERVICE”

mode.

Insert the RENAULT “SERVICE” card

into the card reader 4. All the vehicle

opening elements lock (except the driv-

er’s door).

If they do not, with the engine

switched off, press button 1 (all the

doors and the tailgate lock, with the ex-

ception of the driver’s door) or 2 (the

entire vehicle locks) on the RENAULT

“SERVICE” card.

The interior locking/unlocking

switch 3 is deactivated while the ve-

hicle is in use with the RENAULT

“SERVICE” card.

Each vehicle only has one

RENAULT “SERVICE” card.

When using a RENAULT “SERVICE”

card, the other cards retain all their

functions.

Deactivation of the

“SERVICE” mode

There are two possibilities:

– Press a button on the RENAULT

card (not the RENAULT “SERVICE”

card);

– start the engine with a RENAULT

card (not the RENAULT “SERVICE”

card). With the card in reader 4,

press button 5.

warning buzzer ...................................................... (current page)

doors.....................................................(up to the end of the DU)

locking the doors ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

opening the doors .................................(up to the end of the DU)

closing the doors ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

children ................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

doors/tailgate ........................................ (up to the end of the DU)

1.10

ENG_UD18872_4

Ouverture et fermeture des portes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Doors

OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (1/2)

Opening the doors from the

outside

With the doors unlocked or the “hands-

free” RENAULT card in your posses-

sion, hold handle 1 and pull it towards

you.

In some cases, it may be necessary to

pull the handle twice to open the door.

Opening from the inside

Pull on the handle 2.

Lights-on reminder buzzer

If you have switched off the ignition

and left the lights switched on, a re-

minder buzzer will sound when a door

is opened.

Card reminder buzzer

When the driver’s door is opened and

the card is still in the reader, the mes-

sage “Please remove keycard” appears

on the instrument panel, accompanied

by a beep.

Door/tailgate open buzzer

If a door or the luggage compartment is

open or not properly closed, once the

vehicle reaches 6 mph (10 km/h), the

message “Boot open” or “Door open”

(depending on the door) appears on

the instrument panel, accompanied by

a warning light.

Special note

After switching off the engine, the lights

and any accessories that are in opera-

tion (radio, etc.) will continue to oper-

ate.

They stop as soon as the driver’s door

is opened.

As a safety precaution,

the doors should only be

opened or closed when the

vehicle is stationary.

child safety.............................................................(current page)

children (safety) ..................................................... (current page)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.11

ENG_UD18872_4

Ouverture et fermeture des portes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (2/2)

Child safety

ÇVehicle with switch 1

Press switch 1 to authorise

opening of the rear doors. If the vehicle

is equipped with electric rear windows,

this action will also authorise their use.

The indicator light in the switch lights up

to confirm that the locks have been ac-

tivated.

Note: if there is a system fault, the

message “Check child safety device” is

displayed on the instrument panel: con-

tact an approved Dealer.

Vehicle with manual door locking

Move lever 2 and check from the inside

that the doors are securely locked, to

prevent the rear doors being opened

from the inside.

Safety of rear occupants

The driver can authorise

operation of the rear doors

and, depending on the ve-

hicle, the electric windows by press-

ing switch 1 on the side with the il-

lustration.

Depending on the vehicle, in the

event of a fault:

– a beep sounds;

– a message is displayed on the in-

strument panel;

– the integrated indicator does not

light up.

If the battery has been discon-

nected, press switch 1 on the side

with the symbol, to lock the rear

doors.

Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on

your vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the electric windows or by locking the doors.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside

the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

opening the doors .................................(up to the end of the DU)

closing the doors ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

unlocking the doors .............................. (up to the end of the DU)

central door locking ..............................(up to the end of the DU)

1.12

ENG_UD23610_5

Verrouillage,déverrouillage des ouvrants (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE DOORS (1/2)

Locking/Unlocking the doors

from the outside

This is done using the RENAULT Card;

see the “RENAULT Card” information in

Section 1.

In certain cases, the RENAULT card

may not work:

– if the RENAULT card battery is weak,

flat, etc.

– if equipment operating on the same

frequency as the card (mobile

phones, etc.) is used;

– vehicle located in a high electromag-

netic radiation zone.

It is then possible:

– to use the key integrated into the

card to unlock the front left-hand

door;

– to lock each of the doors manually;

– to use the interior door locking/un-

locking control (refer to the following

pages).

Using the key integrated in

the RENAULT card

– Remove cover A from the left-hand

door (using the end of key 2) in

notch 1;

– move it upwards to remove cover A;

– insert the key 2 into the lock of the

front left-hand door and lock or

unlock.

Locking the doors manually

Turn screw 3 with the door open (using

the end of the key) and close the door.

This means that the doors are then

locked from the outside.

The doors may then only be opened

from the inside or by using the key in

the front left-hand door.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.13

ENG_UD23610_5

Verrouillage,déverrouillage des ouvrants (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE DOORS (2/2)

Interior locking/unlocking

door control

Switch 4 controls the doors, tailgate

and, depending on the vehicle, the fuel

filler flap simultaneously.

If a door or the tailgate is open or not

closed properly, the doors and tailgate

lock/unlock quickly.

If transporting an object with the tail-

gate open, you can still lock the doors:

with the engine stopped, press and

hold switch 4 for more than five sec-

onds to lock the other doors.

Locking the doors without

the RENAULT card

For example, in the event of a dis-

charged battery or the RENAULT card

temporarily not working, etc.

With the engine switched off and a

door or tailgate open, press and hold

switch 4 for more than five seconds.

When the door is closed, all the doors

and the tailgate will be locked.

Unlocking the vehicle from the outside

is only possible with the RENAULT card

in the vehicle's access zone or using

the key integrated in the RENAULT

card.

Door and tailgate status

indicator

When the ignition is on, the indicator

light integrated in switch 4 informs you

of the status of the doors and tailgate:

– indicator light on, the doors and tail-

gate are locked,

– indicator light off, the doors and tail-

gate are unlocked.

When you lock the doors, the indicator

light remains lit and then goes out.

Never leave your vehicle

with the RENAULT card

inside.

After locking/unlocking the vehicle

or the tailgate only using the but-

tons on the RENAULT card, remote

locking and unlocking in hands-free

mode are deactivated.

To reactivate the “hands-free” mode:

restart the vehicle.

Driver’s responsibility

If you decide to keep the

doors locked when you are

driving, remember that it

may be more difficult for those as-

sisting you to gain access to the

passenger compartment in the

event of an emergency.

RENAULT ANTI-INTRUDER DEVICE (RAID) (up to the end of the DU)

central door locking ..............................(up to the end of the DU)

doors.....................................................(up to the end of the DU)

locking the doors ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

doors/tailgate ........................................ (up to the end of the DU)

1.14

ENG_UD15449_2

Condamnation automatique des ouvrants en roulage (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Activating/deactivating the

function

Refer to the information on the “Vehicle

settings customisation menu” in

Section 1, regarding the “Auto door

locking while driving” function:

= function activated

< function deactivated.

Automatic locking when driving

AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHEN DRIVING

You can decide whether you want to

activate this function.

Operating principle

After the vehicle is started, the system

automatically locks the doors when you

are driving at approximately 6 mph (10

km/h) and over.

The door can be unlocked:

– by pressing the door unlocking

button 1.

– by opening a front door (vehicle sta-

tionary).

Note: if a door is opened or closed,

it will automatically lock again when

the vehicle reaches a speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h).

Operating faults

If you experience an operating fault (no

automatic locking, the indicator light in-

corporated in button 1 does not light up

when trying to lock the doors and tail-

gate, etc.), firstly check that the doors

and tailgate are properly closed. If they

are closed correctly, contact an ap-

proved dealer.

Driver’s responsibility

If you decide to keep the

doors locked when you are

driving, remember that it

may be more difficult for those as-

sisting you to gain access to the

passenger compartment in the

event of an emergency.

headrest................................................(up to the end of the DU)

front seats

adjustment ...................................... (up to the end of the DU)

adjusting your driving position .............. (up to the end of the DU)

1.15

ENG_UD18801_8

Appuis-tête avant (B74 - K74 - X81 - J81 - X91 - B91 - K91 - D91 - X95 - B95 - D95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Headrests - Seats

FRONT HEADRESTS

To raise the headrest

Pull the headrest upwards to the de-

sired height.

To lower the headrest

Press button 2 and guide the headrest

down to the desired height.

To adjust the angle of the

headrest

Depending on the vehicle, tilt section A

towards or away from you to the re-

quired position.

To remove the headrest

Raise the headrest to its highest po-

sition (tilt the seatback backwards if

necessary). Press button 1 and lift the

headrest to release it.

To refit the headrest

Pull out the headrest rods 3 as far as

possible by pulling from the top. Take

care to ensure they are clean and cor-

rectly aligned and, if there are any prob-

lems, check that the notches are facing

forwards.

Insert the headrest rods into the holes

(tilt the seatback backwards if neces-

sary).

Lower the headrest until it locks, press

button 1 and lower the headrest as far

as possible.

Check that each headrest rod 3 is se-

curely locked in the seatback by trying

to pull them up or push them down.

The headrest is an impor-

tant safety component:

ensure that it is in place and

in the correct position. The

distance between your head and the

headrest and the distance between

the head and section A should be

as small as possible.

The three upper positions can

be manipulated without pressing

button 2. However, it is preferable to

press this button to lower the head-

rest.

headrest................................................(up to the end of the DU)

adjusting your driving position .............. (up to the end of the DU)

1.16

ENG_UD18911_2

Appuis-tête arrière (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

REAR HEADRESTS

Position for use

Raise or lower the headrest while pull-

ing it towards the front of the vehicle.

To remove the headrest

Press tabs A of rods 1 and 2 simultane-

ously and remove the headrest.

Note: on the three door version, first

lower the bench seatback (refer to the

information on the “Rear seat functions”

in Section 3).

To refit the headrest

Insert the headrest rods into the

sleeves, and lower the headrest to the

first notch.

Storage position

Lower the headrest as far as possi-

ble, then press tab 2 and lower it com-

pletely.

When the headrest is set at the

lowest position (position B) this is

for storage only: it should not be in

this position when a seat is occupied.

The headrest is a safety

component. Ensure that it is

fitted and in the correct po-

sition: the top of your head

should be in line with the top of the

headrest.

front seat adjustment ............................ (up to the end of the DU)

front seats

adjustment ...................................... (up to the end of the DU)

front seats

with manual controls ........................................(current page)

1.17

ENG_UD21479_4

Sièges avant à commandes manuelles (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Seats

FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (1/2)

To move the seat forwards or

back

Lift handle 1 to release. Release the

handle once the seat is in the correct

position and ensure that the seat is fully

locked into position.

To raise or lower the seat

base

Move lever 2 as many times as neces-

sary upwards or downwards.

To tilt the seatback

Turn control knob 3 to the required po-

sition.

Heated seats

(depending on vehicle)

With the engine running, turn control 4

to either position I, II or III (depending

on the temperature required). An in-

dicator light on the instrument panel

lights up once the front seat heating

system is operating.

The system, which has a thermostat,

decides whether or not the heating is

needed, according to the position se-

lected.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is not being

driven.

We would advise you not to recline

the seatbacks too far to ensure that

the effectiveness of the seat belts is

not reduced.

Nothing should be placed on the

floor (area in front of driver) as such

objects may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus

obstructing its use.

1.18

ENG_UD21479_4

Sièges avant à commandes manuelles (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Table function

Depending on the vehicle, the passen-

ger seatback may be folded down onto

the seat base to create a table.

Lower the headrest, move the seat

back, tilt handle 6 and completely lower

the seatback.

For your safety, attach any

transported objects when

the seat is in the table po-

sition.

FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (2/2)

To adjust the lumbar support

on the driver’s seat

Lower handle 5 to increase the support

and lift to decrease it.

When the front seat is in

table position, the front pas-

senger air bag must be dis-

abled (see information on

“Child safety: activating/deactivat-

ing the front passenger air bag” in

Section 1).

Risk of serious injury caused by

items resting on the seatback table

which may be dislodged when the

air bag is deployed.

The label (on the dashboard) and

the markings (on the windscreen)

remind you of these instructions.

front seats

with electric controls ........................................(current page)

1.19

ENG_UD18878_3

Sièges avant à à commandes électriques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Switch 3 is used for adjusting the seat-

back and switch 4 is used for adjusting

the seat squab.

On equipped vehicles, buttons 1 are

used to store the chosen driving posi-

tion (refer to the following page).

Adjusting the seat squab:

– To move the seat forwards or back

Move switch 4 forwards or back-

wards.

– To raise or lower the seat base

Move the switch 4 upwards or down-

wards.

Adjusting the lumbar support

on the driver’s seat:

Lower handle 5 to increase the support

and lift to decrease it.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is not being

driven.

We would advise you not

to recline the seatbacks too

far to ensure that the effec-

tiveness of the seat belts is

not reduced.

Nothing should be placed on the

floor (area in front of driver) as such

objects may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus

obstructing its use.

Adjusting the seatback:

To tilt the seatback, move the top of

switch 3 forwards or backwards.

Heated seats

(depending on vehicle)

With the engine running, turn control 2

to either position 1, 2 or 3 (depending

on the temperature required). An in-

dicator light on the instrument panel

lights up once the front seat heating

system is operating.

The system, which has a thermostat,

decides whether or not the heating is

needed, according to the position se-

lected.

FRONT SEATS WITH ELECTRIC CONTROL

storing the driver’s seat position ...........(up to the end of the DU)

front seat

driver’s position memory ................. (up to the end of the DU)

1.20

ENG_UD18876_1

Siège avant à commande électrique avec mémorisation (B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

FRONT SEATS WITH ELECTRIC CONTROL WITH STORAGE OF SETTINGS

It is possible to store three driving po-

sitions.

A driving position includes the settings

for the seat base and seatback of the

driver’s seat.

The system operates:

– with the “hands-free” card de-

tected or, depending on the vehicle,

RENAULT card in the card reader;

– when the driver’s door is opened.

Storing your driving position

– Adjust the seat using switches 4

and 5 (see previous page);

– press one of buttons 1, 2 or 3 until a

beep is heard: the driving position is

stored;

– to store other driving positions

repeat this procedure with the other

buttons.

Recalling a stored driving

position

With the vehicle stationary, briefly

press button 1, 2 or 3 depending on the

required stored driving position.

Note: recall of the stored driving po-

sition is interrupted if one of the seat

adjustment buttons is pressed during

recall.

When driving, it is not possible to

recall a driving position.

123

We would advise you not

to recline the seatbacks too

far to ensure that the effec-

tiveness of the seat belts is

not reduced.

Nothing should be placed on the

floor (area in front of driver) as such

objects may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus

obstructing its use.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is not being

driven.

access to the rear seats ........................................ (current page)

1.21

ENG_UD21771_3

Sièges avant: accès aux places arrière (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Electrically controlled seats

Lift handle 1 and tilt the seatback com-

pletely: the seat moves forward.

To return the seat to its original position,

bring the seatback back up. The seat

returns to its original position.

ACCESS TO REAR SEATS, THREE-DOOR VERSION

Manually controlled seats

Lift handle 1 and slide the seat forward.

To return the seat to its original position,

bring the seatback back into position. Check that no object or

person prevents the front

seat from locking. If so,

remove any obstacles

behind the front seats. Adjust the

seat to allow sufficient room in the

rear. The rear occupants/objects

should then return to the vehicle.

Repeat the above until the seat is

locked correctly.

Risk of seat moving on its runners

during vehicle acceleration or brak-

ing.

Do not move handle 1 and handle 2

or switch 4 at the same time.

Locking the seats

When a person, an object or a child

seat prevents the front seats from lock-

ing, perform the following operations:

– ask all of the passengers to leave

the vehicle and remove any bulky

objects from the rear seats;

– lock the seat(s) in the initial position

again;

– move the seat(s) forwards in order to

create sufficient space;

– ask the passengers to get back into

the vehicle, and refit the child seat or

objects on the rear seats.

Special note: if the seatback is

tilted over the rear bench seat, only

use control 3 to return it to the driv-

ing position.

Never use handle 1 as it is not de-

signed for this purpose: there is a

risk of damage to the mechanism.

seat belts .............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

driving position

settings ...........................................(up to the end of the DU)

adjusting your driving position ............................... (current page)

front seats

adjustment ...................................... (up to the end of the DU)

1.22

ENG_UD25632_7

Ceintures de sécurité (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Always wear your seat belt when trav-

elling in your vehicle. You must also

comply with the legislation of the par-

ticular country you are in.

Seat belts

Incorrectly adjusted or

twisted seat belts may

cause injuries in the event

of an accident.

Use one seat belt per person,

whether child or adult.

Even pregnant women should wear

a seat belt. In this case, ensure that

the lap belt is not exerting too much

pressure on the abdomen, but do

not allow any slack.

Before starting, first adjust your driv-

ing position, then ask all occupants

to adjust their seat belts to ensure

optimum protection.

Adjusting your driving

position

– Sit well back in your seat (having

first removed your coat or jacket).

This is essential to ensure your back

is positioned correctly;

– adjust the distance between the

seat and the pedals. Your seat

should be as far back as possible

while still allowing you to depress

the clutch pedal fully. The seatback

should be adjusted so that your arms

are slightly bent when you hold the

steering wheel;

– adjust the position of your head-

rest. For maximum safety, your head

must be as close as possible to the

headrest;

– adjust the height of the seat. This

adjustment allows you to select the

seat position which offers you the

best possible view;

– adjust the position of the steering

wheel.

Adjusting the seat belts

Sit with your back firmly against the

seatback.

Shoulder strap 1 should be as close as

possible to the base of the neck but not

on it.

Lap belt 2 should be worn flat over the

thighs and against the pelvis.

The belt should be worn so that it is

as close as possible to your body, i.e.:

avoid wearing heavy clothing or keep-

ing bulky objects under the belts, etc.

SEAT BELTS (1/3)

Make sure that the rear bench seat

is locked in position correctly so that

the rear seat belts will operate effi-

ciently. Refer to the information on

the “Rear bench seat” in Section 3.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.23

ENG_UD25632_7

Ceintures de sécurité (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

SEAT BELTS (2/3)

Adjusting the front seat belt

height

(depending on vehicle)

Press button 5 to adjust the seat belt

height so that shoulder strap 1 is worn

as shown previously:

– to lower the seat belt, press button 5

and lower the seat belt at the same

time;

– to raise the seat belt, press button 5

and raise the seat belt at the same

time.

Make sure that the seat belt is locked

in position correctly after you have ad-

justed it.

Locking

Unwind the belt slowly and smoothly

and ensure that buckle 3 locks into

catch 4 (check that it is locked by pull-

ing on buckle 3). If the belt jams, allow

it to return slightly before attempting to

unwind it again.

If your seat belt is completely jammed,

pull slowly, but firmly, so that just over

3 cm unwinds. Allow it to return slightly

before attempting to unwind it again.

If there is still a problem, contact an ap-

proved dealer.

ßFront seat belt reminder

warning light

This lights up on the central display

when the engine is started then, if the

driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt

(if this seat is occupied) is not fastened

and the vehicle has reached approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h), it flashes and

a bleep sounds for around 2 minutes.

Note: an object placed on the passen-

ger seat base may activate the warning

light in some cases.

Rear seat belt reminder (depending

on vehicle)

the ß warning light on the cen-

tral display lights up accompanied by a

message on the instrument panel indi-

cating the number of seat belts buck-

led for approximately 30 seconds each

time:

– the vehicle is started;

– a door is opened;

– a rear seat belt is fastened or unfas-

tened.

Check that the rear passengers are

wearing seat belts and that the number

of seat belt shown as fastened corre-

sponds to the number of rear bench

seat places occupied.

1.24

ENG_UD25632_7

Ceintures de sécurité (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

SEAT BELTS (3/3)

The following information applies to the vehicle’s front and rear seat belts.

Unfastening

Press button 6 and the seat belt will be

rewound by the inertia reel. Guide the

belt.

Note: when driving, if a rear seat belt

is unbuckled, the message “Rear seat

belt unbuckled” appears on the instru-

ment panel.

– No modification may be made to the component parts of the originally

fitted restraint system: belts, seats and their mountings. For special op-

erations (e.g. fitting child seats), contact an authorised dealer.

– Do not use devices which allow any slack in the belts (e.g. clothes

pegs, clips, etc.): a seat belt which is worn too loosely may cause injury in the

event of an accident.

– Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back.

– Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or

child on your lap with your seat belt around them.

– The belt should never be twisted.

– Following an accident, have the seat belts checked and replaced if necessary.

Always replace your seat belts as soon as they show any signs of wear.

– Make sure that the buckle is inserted into the appropriate catch.

– Ensure that no objects are placed in the area around the seat belt catch as

they could prevent it from being properly secured.

– When repositioning the rear bench seat, make sure that the seat belt is cor-

rectly positioned so that it can be used properly.

– Make sure the seat belt catch is properly positioned (it should not be hidden

away, crushed or flattened by people or objects).

seat belts .............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

additional methods of restraint ............. (up to the end of the DU)

additional methods of restraint

to the rear seat belts .......................(up to the end of the DU)

seat belt pretensioners ......................... (up to the end of the DU)

air bag...................................................(up to the end of the DU)

methods of restraint in addition to the front seat belts (up to the end of the DU)

additional methods of restraint

to the front seat belts ...................... (up to the end of the DU)

seat belt pretensioners

front seat belt ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts (up to the end of the DU)

pretensioners .........................................................(current page)

1.25

ENG_UD21483_5

Dispositifs complémentaires aux ceintures avant (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Additional methods of restraint:

to the front seat belts

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (1/4)

Depending on the vehicle, they are

composed of:

– seat belt inertia reel pretension-

ers;

– lap belt pretensioners;

– chest-level load limiters;

– anti-submarining air bags;

– air bags for driver and front pas-

senger.

These systems are designed to act in-

dependently or together when the vehi-

cle is subjected to a frontal impact.

Depending on the severity of the

impact, the system can trigger:

– seat belt locking;

– the seat belt inertia reel pretensioner

(which engages to correct seat belt

slack);

– the low volume front air bag;

– the lap seat belt pretensioners to

hold the occupant in his seat;

– the large volume front air bag.

Pretensioners

The pretensioners hold the seat belt

against the body, holding the occupant

more securely against the seat, thus in-

creasing the seat belt’s efficiency.

In the event of a severe frontal impact

and if the ignition is switched on, the

system may engage the following de-

pending on the force of the impact:

– seat belt inertia reel pretensioner 1

which instantly retracts the seat belt;

– the lap pretensioner 2 on the front

seats.

– Have the entire restraint

system checked following

an accident.

– No operation whatso-

ever is permitted on any part of

the system (pretensioners, air

bags, computers, wiring) and the

system components must not

be reused on any other vehicle,

even if identical.

– To avoid incorrect triggering of

the system which may cause

injury, only qualified personnel

from an approved dealer may

work on the pretensioner and air

bag system.

– The electric trigger system may

only be tested by a specially

trained technician using special

equipment.

– When the vehicle is scrapped,

contact an approved dealer for

disposal of the pretensioner and

air bag gas generators.

1.26

ENG_UD21483_5

Dispositifs complémentaires aux ceintures avant (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (2/4)

Load limiter

Above a certain severity of impact, this

mechanism is used to limit the force of

the belt against the body so that it is at

an acceptable level.

Anti-submarining air bag

Located on each of the front seats, it

deploys in order to prevent the occu-

pant from sliding under the seat belt.

Air bags for driver and front

passenger

Fitted to the driver and passenger side.

Depending on the vehicle, the pres-

ence of this equipment is indicated

by the word “Airbag” on the steering

wheel, dashboard (air bag zone A) and

a symbol on the lower section of the

windscreen.

Each air bag system consists of:

– an air bag and gas generator fitted

on the steering wheel for the driver

and in the dashboard for the front

passenger;

– an electronic unit for system monitor-

ing which controls the gas generator

electrical trigger system;

– remote sensors;

– a single warning light å on the

instrument panel.

The air bag system uses

pyrotechnic principles. This

explains why, when the air

bag inflates, it will gener-

ate heat, produce smoke (this does

not mean that a fire is about to start)

and make a noise upon detonation.

In a situation where an air bag is

required, it will inflate immediately

and this may cause some minor, su-

perficial grazing to the skin or other

problems.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.27

ENG_UD21483_5

Dispositifs complémentaires aux ceintures avant (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (3/4)

Operation

This system is only operational when

the ignition is switched on.

In a severe frontal impact, the air bags

inflate rapidly, cushioning the impact

of the driver’s head and chest against

the steering wheel and the front pas-

senger against the dashboard. The air

bags then deflate immediately so that

the passengers are not in any way hin-

dered from leaving the vehicle.

Special feature of the front air

bag

After a violent impact, it has two deploy-

ment volumes and integrates a ventila-

tion system:

– small volume air bag, this is the first

stage of operation;

– large volume air bag, the air bag

seams rip so that a larger volume of

gas is released into the bag (for the

most severe impacts).

1.28

ENG_UD21483_5

Dispositifs complémentaires aux ceintures avant (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (4/4)

Warnings concerning the driver’s air bag

– Do not modify the steering wheel or the steering wheel boss.

– Do not cover the steering wheel boss under any circumstances.

– Do not attach any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the steering wheel boss.

– The steering wheel must not be removed (except by qualified personnel from our Network).

– When driving, do not sit too close to the steering wheel. Sit with your arms slightly bent (see the information on “Adjusting

your driving position” in Section 1). This will allow sufficient space for the air bag to deploy correctly and be fully effective.

Warnings concerning the passenger air bag

– Do not attach or glue any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the dashboard on or near the air bag.

– Do not place anything between the dashboard and the passenger (pet, umbrella, walking stick, parcels, etc.).

– The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may occur. In

general, parts of the body should be kept away from the dashboard (knees, hands, head, etc.).

– The devices in addition to the front passenger seat belt should be reactivated as soon as a child seat is removed, to ensure

the protection of the passenger in the event of an impact.

A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT MUST NOT BE FITTED TO THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT UNLESS

THE ADDITIONAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, I.E. THE PASSENGER AIR BAG, ARE DEACTIVATED.

(refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag” in Section 1)

Warnings concerning the anti-submarining air bag

Do not let a child under the age of 12 sit in this seat. When triggered, the anti-submarining air bag may project objects left on

the seat base with a great deal of force.

Risk of serious injury.

All of the warnings below are given so that the air bag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent

the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when the air bag inflates.

additional methods of restraint

to the rear seat belts .......................(up to the end of the DU)

methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts (up to the end of the DU)

air bag...................................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.29

ENG_UD13820_2

Dispositifs complémentaires aux ceintures arrière (X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

to the rear seat belts

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE REAR SEAT BELTS

Force limiter

Above a certain severity of impact, this

mechanism is used to limit the force of

the belt against the body so that it is at

an acceptable level.

– Have the entire restraint

system checked following

an accident.

– No operation whatsoever

is permitted on any part of the

system (air bags, electronic con-

trol units, wiring) and the system

components must not be reused

on any other vehicle, even if iden-

tical.

– Only qualified personnel from

our Network may work on the air

bags; otherwise the system may

trigger accidentally and cause

injury.

air bag...................................................(up to the end of the DU)

additional methods of restraint

side protection ................................(up to the end of the DU)

methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts (up to the end of the DU)

seat belts .............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

air bag...................................................(up to the end of the DU)

side protection devices ......................... (up to the end of the DU)

1.30

ENG_UD6274_1

Dispositifs de protection latérale (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

side protection

SIDE PROTECTION DEVICES

Warnings concerning the side air bag

– Fitting seat covers: seats equipped with an air bag require covers

specifically designed for your vehicle. Contact an approved Dealer to find

out if these covers are available. The use of any covers other than those

designed for your vehicle (and including those designed for another vehicle)

may affect the operation of the air bags and reduce your protection.

– Do not place any accessories, objects or even pets between the seatback, the

door and the internal fittings. Do not cover the seatback with any items such as

clothes or accessories. This may prevent the air bag from operating correctly

or cause injury when the air bag is deployed.

– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the seat or internal

fittings, except by qualified personnel from an approved dealer.

– The area between the rear bench seatback and the trim is the area of air bag

operation: no objects must be placed here.

Side air bags

These air bags are fitted to the front

seats and are activated at the sides of

the seats (door side) to protect the oc-

cupants in the event of a severe side

impact.

Curtain air bags

These are air bags fitted along the sides

of the vehicle in the ceiling which trigger

along the front and rear side windows

to protect the passengers in case of a

severe side impact.

air bag...................................................(up to the end of the DU)

methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts (up to the end of the DU)

additional methods of restraint ............. (up to the end of the DU)

seat belts .............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

air bag...................................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.31

ENG_UD10819_2

Dispositifs de retenue complémentaire (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT

The air bag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. Both

the air bags and seat belts are integral parts of the same protection

system. It is therefore essential to wear seat belts at all times. If seat belts

are not worn, the occupants are exposed to the risk of serious injury in

the event of an accident. It may also increase the risk of minor superficial injuries

occurring when the air bag is deployed, although such minor injuries are always

possible with air bags.

If the vehicle should overturn or suffer a rear impact, however severe, the pre-

tensioners and air bags are not always triggered. Shocks to the underbody of the

vehicle, e.g. from pavements, potholes or stones, can all trigger these systems.

– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on any part of the air

bag system (air bags, pretensioners, computer, wiring harness, etc.), except

by qualified personnel from an approved dealer.

– To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid accidental trig-

gering of the system which may cause injury, only qualified Network personnel

may work on the air bag system.

– As a safety precaution, have the air bag system checked if your vehicle has

been involved in an accident, or is stolen or broken into.

– When selling or lending the vehicle, inform the user of these points and hand

over this driver’s handbook with the vehicle.

– When scrapping your vehicle, contact your approved dealer for disposal of the

gas generator(s).

Operating faults

Warning light 1 will light up on the in-

strument panel when the ignition is

switched on and then go out after a few

seconds.

If it does not come on when the ignition

is switched on, or if it comes on when

the engine is running, there is a fault

with the system (air bags, pretension-

ers, etc.) in the front and/or rear seats.

Contact your approved dealer as soon

as possible. Your protection will be re-

duced until this fault is rectified.

All of the warnings below are given so that the air bag is not obstructed in any

way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused

by items which may be dislodged when the air bag inflates.

child safety............................................(up to the end of the DU)

child restraint/seat ................................(up to the end of the DU)

child seats.............................................(up to the end of the DU)

transporting children ............................. (up to the end of the DU)

children ................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

1.32

ENG_UD18356_1

Sécurité enfants : généralités (X45 - H45 - L38 - X38 - X32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Child safety: General information

CHILD SAFETY: General information (1/2)

Carrying children

Children, and adults, must be correctly

seated and strapped in for all journeys.

The children being carried in your vehi-

cle are your responsibility.

A child is not a miniature adult. Children

are at risk of specific injuries as their

muscles and bones have not yet fin-

ished growing. The seat belt alone

would not provide suitable protection.

Use an approved child seat and ensure

you use it correctly.

A collision at 30 mph (50

km/h) is the same as fall-

ing a distance of 10 metres.

Transporting a child without

a restraint is the equivalent of allow-

ing him or her to play on a fourth-

floor balcony without railings.

Never travel with a child held in your

arms. In the event of an accident,

you will not be able to keep hold of

the child, even if you yourself are

wearing a seat belt.

If your vehicle has been involved in

a road accident, replace the child

seat and have the seat belts and

ISOFIX anchorage points checked.

To prevent the doors being

opened, use the “Child

safety” device (refer to the

information on “Opening

and closing the doors” in Section 1).

Driver’s responsibility

when parking or stopping

the vehicle

Never leave an animal,

child or adult who is not self-suffi-

cient alone on your vehicle, even for

a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or by locking the

doors.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,

please remember that the tempera-

ture inside the passenger compart-

ment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY.

child safety............................................(up to the end of the DU)

child restraint/seat ................................(up to the end of the DU)

child seats.............................................(up to the end of the DU)

transporting children ............................. (up to the end of the DU)

children ................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.33

ENG_UD18356_1

Sécurité enfants : généralités (X45 - H45 - L38 - X38 - X32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

CHILD SAFETY: General information (2/2)

Using a child seat

The level of protection offered by the

child seat depends on its ability to re-

strain your child and on its installation.

Incorrect installation compromises the

protection it offers the child in the event

of harsh braking or an impact.

Before purchasing a child seat, check

that it complies with the regulations for

the country you are in and that it can

be fitted in your vehicle. Consult an ap-

proved dealer to find out which seats

are recommended for your vehicle.

Before fitting a child seat, read the

manual and respect its instructions. If

you experience any difficulties during

installation, contact the manufacturer

of the equipment. Keep the instructions

with the seat.

Set a good example by always fas-

tening your seat belt and teaching

your child:

– to strap themselves in correctly;

– to always get in and out of the car

at the kerb, away from busy traf-

fic.

Do not use a second-hand child

seat or one without an instruction

manual.

Check that there are no objects in

the vicinity of the child seat which

could impede its operation.

Never leave a child unat-

tended in the vehicle.

Check that your child is

always strapped in and that

the belt or safety harness used is

correctly set and adjusted. Avoid

wearing bulky clothing which could

cause the belts to slacken.

Never let your child put their head or

arms out of the window.

Check that the child is in the correct

position for the entire journey, espe-

cially if asleep.

1.34

ENG_UD18759_2

Sécurité enfants : choix du siège enfant (X35 - L35 - X45 - H45 - X77 - X91 - X83 - X61 - X77 ph2 - X95 - L38 - X38 - X62 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

CHILD SAFETY: Choosing a child seat

Rear-facing child seats

A baby’s head is, proportionally, heavier

than that of an adult and its neck is very

fragile. Transport the child in this posi-

tion as long as possible (until the age of

2 at the very least). It supports both the

head and the neck.

Choose a bucket type seat for best side

protection and change it as soon as the

child’s head is higher than the shell.

Forward-facing child seats

The child’s head and abdomen need to

be protected as a priority. A forward-fac-

ing child seat which is firmly attached to

the vehicle will reduce the risk of impact

to the head. Ensure your child travels in

a forward-facing seat with a harness or

buckle for as long as their size permits.

Choose a bucket type seat for optimum

side protection.w

Booster cushions

From 15 kg or 4 years, the child can

travel using a booster seat, which will

enable the seat belt to be adapted to

suit his size and shape. The booster

seat cushion must be fitted with guides

to position the seat belt on the child’s

thighs rather than the stomach. It is

recommended that you use a seat-

back which can be adjusted in terms

of height to position the seat belt in the

centre of the shoulder. It must never

rest on the neck or on the arm.

Choose a bucket type seat for optimum

side protection.

child restraint/seat ................................(up to the end of the DU)

child safety............................................(up to the end of the DU)

child seats.............................................(up to the end of the DU)

transporting children ............................. (up to the end of the DU)

towing rings ..........................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.35

ENG_UD16659_3

Sécurité enfants : choix de la fixation du siège enfant (D91 - X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - L38 - X38 - X32 - B32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

choosing a child seat mounting

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (1/2)

There are two ways of attaching child

seats: via the seat belt or using the

ISOFIX system.

Attachment via the seat belt

The seat belt must be adjusted to

ensure that it is effective in the event of

harsh braking or an impact.

Ensure that the strap paths indicated

by the child seat manufacturer are re-

spected.

Always check that the seat belt is cor-

rectly fastened by pulling it up, then

pulling it out fully whilst pressing on the

child seat.

Check that the seat is correctly held by

moving it from side to side and back

to front: the seat should remain firmly

fixed.

Check that the child seat has not been

installed at an angle and that it is not

resting against a window.

Attachment using the ISOFIX

system

Authorised ISOFIX child seats are ap-

proved in accordance with regulation

ECE-R44 in one of the three following

scenarios:

– ISOFIX universal 3-point forward-

facing seat

– ISOFIX semi-universal 2-point seat

– specific

For the latter two, check that your child

seat can be installed by consulting the

list of compatible vehicles.

Attach the child seat with the ISOFIX

locks, if these are provided. The ISOFIX

system allows quick, easy, safe fitting.

The ISOFIX system consists of 2 rings

and, in some cases, a third ring.

Before using an ISOFIX

child seat that you pur-

chased for another vehicle,

check that its installation is

authorised. Consult the list of ve-

hicles which can be fitted with the

seat from the equipment manufac-

turer.

No modifications may be

made to the component

parts of the restraint system

(seat belts, ISOFIX, seats

and their mountings) originally fitted.

The seat belt must never

be twisted or the tension

relieved. Never pass the

shoulder strap under the

arm or behind the back.

Check that the seat belt has not

been damaged by sharp edges.

If the seat belt does not operate nor-

mally, it will not protect the child.

Consult an approved dealer. Do not

use this seat until the seat belt has

been repaired.

Do not use the child seat

if it may unfasten the seat

belt restraining it: the base

of the seat must not rest on

the buckle and/or catch of the seat

belt.

1.36

ENG_UD16659_3

Sécurité enfants : choix de la fixation du siège enfant (D91 - X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - L38 - X38 - X32 - B32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (2/2)

The ISOFIX anchorage

points have been exclu-

sively designed for child

seats with the ISOFIX

system. Never fit a different type of

child seat, seat belt or other objects

to these anchorage points.

Check that nothing is obstructing

the anchorage points.

If your vehicle has been involved in

a road accident, have the ISOFIX

anchorage points checked and re-

place your child seat.

The third ring is used to attach the

upper strap on some child seats.

Pass the belt between the seatback

and the rear parcel shelf (to remove

the parcel shelf: refer to Section 3

“Parcel shelf”). Fix the hook on one of

the rings 3 located in the luggage com-

partment (visible for three- and five-

door versions; under the carpet and

indicated with a marking on the Sport

tourer version).

Pull the belt so that the back of the child

seat comes into contact with the vehicle

seatback.

The two rings 1 are located between

the seatback and the seat base of the

seat and are identified by a marking.

To ensure your child seat can be easily

fitted and locked on the rings 1, use

access guides 2 on the child seat.

child restraint/seat ................................(up to the end of the DU)

child safety............................................(up to the end of the DU)

child seats.............................................(up to the end of the DU)

transporting children ............................. (up to the end of the DU)

1.37

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Some seats are not suitable for fitting

child seats. The diagram on the follow-

ing page shows you how to attach a

child seat.

The types of child seats indicated may

not be available. Before using a differ-

ent child seat, check with the manufac-

turer that it can be fitted.

fitting a child seat

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (1/11)

In the rear side seat

A carrycot can be installed across the

vehicle and will take up at least two

seats. Position the child with his or her

feet nearest the door.

Push the vehicle seat fully forwards

to install a rear-facing child seat, then

push it back as far as possible with-

out allowing it to make contact with the

child seat.

For the safety of the child in the for-

ward-facing seat, do not move the seat

in front back past the middle of the

runner, do not tilt the seatback too far

(maximum of 25°) and raise the seat as

much as possible.

Check that the forward-facing child seat

is resting against the back of the vehi-

cle seat and that the headrest of the ve-

hicle is not obstructing its use.

In the front seat

The laws concerning children travel-

ling in the front passenger seat differ in

every country. Consult the legislation in

force and follow the indications on the

diagram on the following page.

Before fitting a child seat in this seat (if

authorised):

– lower the seat belt as far as possible;

– move the seat as far back as possi-

ble;

– gently tilt the seatback away from

vertical (approximately 25°);

– on equipped vehicles, raise the seat

base as far as possible.

Do not change these settings after the

child seat is installed.

RISK OF DEATH OR

SERIOUS INJURY: before

fitting a rear-facing child

seat in this position, check

that the air bag has been deacti-

vated (refer to the information on

“Child safety: deactivating/activat-

ing the front passenger air bag” in

Section 1).

Fit the child seat in a rear

seat wherever possible.

Check that when installing

the child seat in the vehicle

it is not at risk of coming loose from

its base.

If you have to remove the headrest,

check that it is correctly stored so

that it does not come loose under

harsh braking or impact.

Always attach the child seat to the

vehicle even if it is not in use so that

it does not come loose under harsh

braking or impact.

Ensure that the child seat

or the child’s feet do not

prevent the front seat from

locking correctly. Refer to

the information on the “Front seat”

in Section 1.

1.38

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (2/11)

Type of child seat

three and five door

versions (five seats)

Weight of

the child

Seat size

ISOFIX

Passenger front

seat (1) (2) Rear side seats Rear centre

seat

Carrycot fitted across the

vehicle

Group 0

< 10 kg F - G X U - IL (3) X

Rear-facing shell seat

Group 0 or 0+ < 13 kg E U U - IL (4) X

Rear-facing seat

Group 0+ and 1

< 13 kg and

9 to 18 kg

D U U - IL (4) X

C U U (4) X

Forward-facing seat

Group 1 9 to 18 kg A, B, B1 X U - IUF - IL (5) X

Booster seat

Group 2 and 3

15 to 25 kg and

22 to 36 kg X U (5) X

(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before installing a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat,

check that the air bag has been deactivated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front

passenger air bag” at the end of the paragraph).

The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the appli-

cable regulations are respected.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.39

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (3/11)

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats.

U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.

IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal”/“semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be

attached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.

(2) Only a rear-facing child seat can be fitted in this seat: raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible,

tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).

(3) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest

the door.

(4) Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will

go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.

(5) Forward-facing child seat; position the seatback of the child seat in contact with the seatback of the vehicle seat. Adjust the

headrest, or remove it if necessary. Do not push the front seat more than halfway back on its runners and do not recline the

seatback more than 25°.

1.40

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

² Seat not suitable for fitting child

seats.

Child seat attached using the belt

¬ Seat which allows a child seat

with “Universal” approval to be attached

by a seat belt.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before fitting a rear-facing child

seat in the front passenger seat, check that the air bag has been deacti-

vated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the

front passenger air bag” at the end of the paragraph).

Child seat attached using the ISOFIX

mounting

ü Seat which allows an ISOFIX

child seat to be fitted.

± The rear seats are fitted with

an anchorage point which allows a

forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with

universal approval to be fitted. The an-

chorage points are located in the lug-

gage compartment and are visible.

The size of the ISOFIX child seat is in-

dicated by a letter:

– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats

in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);

– C: rear-facing seats in group 1 (9 to

18 kg);

– D and E: shell seat or rear-facing

seats in group 0 or 0+ (less than

13 kg);

– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than

10 kg).

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (4/11)

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for

this vehicle will not correctly

protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

Visual installation of three

and five door versions (five

seats)

³ Check the status of the air bag

before fitting a child seat or allowing a

passenger to use the seat.

− Seat which only allows a rear-

facing seat with “Universal” approval

to be attached with a seat belt.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.41

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

² Seat not suitable for fitting child

seats.

Child seat attached using the belt

¬ Seat which allows a child seat

with “Universal” approval to be attached

by a seat belt.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before fitting a rear-facing child

seat in the front passenger seat, check that the air bag has been deacti-

vated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the

front passenger air bag” at the end of the paragraph).

Child seat attached using the ISOFIX

mounting

ü Seat which allows an ISOFIX

child seat to be fitted.

± The rear seats are fitted with

an anchorage point which allows a

forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with

universal approval to be fitted. The an-

chorage points are located in the lug-

gage compartment and are visible.

The size of the ISOFIX child seat is in-

dicated by a letter:

– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats

in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);

– C: rear-facing seats in group 1 (9 to

18 kg);

– D and E: shell seat or rear-facing

seats in group 0 or 0+ (less than

13 kg);

– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than

10 kg).

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (5/11)

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for

this vehicle will not correctly

protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

Visual installation of five

door versions (four seats)

³ Check the status of the air bag

before fitting a child seat or allowing a

passenger to use the seat.

− Seat which only allows a rear-

facing seat with “Universal” approval

to be attached with a seat belt.

1.42

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (6/11)

Type of child seat

five door version

(four seats)

Weight of

the child

Seat size

ISOFIX

Passenger front

seat (1) (2) Rear side seats

Carrycot fitted across the

vehicle

Group 0

< 10 kg F - G X U - IL (3)

Rear-facing shell seat

Group 0 or 0+ < 13 kg E U U - IL (4)

Rear-facing seat

Group 0+ and 1

< 13 kg and

9 to 18 kg

D U U - IL (4)

C U U (4)

Forward-facing seat

Group 1 9 to 18 kg A, B, B1 X U - IUF - IL (5)

Booster seat

Group 2 and 3

15 to 25 kg and

22 to 36 kg X U (5)

(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before installing a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat,

check that the air bag has been deactivated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front

passenger air bag” at the end of the paragraph).

The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the regula-

tions in force are respected.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.43

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats.

U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.

IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal”/“semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be

attached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.

(2) Only a rear-facing child seat can be fitted in this seat: raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible,

tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).

(3) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest

the door.

(4) Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will

go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.

(5) Forward-facing child seat; position the seatback of the child seat in contact with the seatback of the vehicle seat. Adjust the

headrest, or remove it if necessary. Do not push the front seat more than halfway back on its runners and do not recline the

seatback more than 25°.

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (7/11)

1.44

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

² Seat not suitable for fitting child

seats.

Child seat attached using the belt

¬ Seat which allows a child seat

with “Universal” approval to be attached

by a seat belt.

Child seat attached using the ISOFIX

mounting

ü Seat which allows an ISOFIX

child seat to be fitted.

± The rear seats are fitted with

an anchorage point which allows a

forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with

universal approval to be fitted. The an-

chorage points are located under the

luggage compartment carpet and are

indicated by a marking.

The size of the ISOFIX child seat is in-

dicated by a letter:

– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats

in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);

– C: rear-facing seats in group 1 (9 to

18 kg);

– D and E: shell seat or rear-facing

seats in group 0 or 0+ (less than

13 kg);

– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than

10 kg).

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (8/11)

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for

this vehicle will not correctly

protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

Visual installation of the

estate version (five seats)

³ Check the status of the air bag

before fitting a child seat or allowing a

passenger to use the seat.

− Seat which only allows a rear-

facing seat with “Universal” approval

to be attached with a seat belt.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before fitting a rear-facing child

seat in the front passenger seat, check that the air bag has been deacti-

vated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the

front passenger air bag” at the end of the paragraph).

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.45

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Type of child seat

estate version (five seats)

Weight of

the child

Seat size

ISOFIX

Front passenger

seat (1) (5) Rear side seats Rear centre

seat

Carrycot fitted across the vehicle

Group 0 < 10 kg F - G X U - IL (2) X

Shell seat/rear-facing seat

Group 0, or 0+ and 1

< 13 kg and 9 to

18 kg E, D, C U U - IL (3) X

Forward-facing seat

Group 1 9 to 18 kg A, B, B1 X U - IUF - IL (4) X

Booster seat

Group 2 and 3

15 to 25 kg and 22

to 36 kg X U (4) X

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats.

U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.

IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal”/“semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be

attached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.

(1) Only a rear-facing child seat can be fitted in this seat: raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible,

tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).

(2) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest

the door.

(3) Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will

go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.

(4) Forward-facing child seat; position the seatback of the child seat in contact with the seatback of the vehicle seat. Adjust the

headrest, or remove it if necessary. Do not push the front seat more than halfway back on its runners and do not recline the

seatback more than 25°.

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (9/11)

(5) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before installing a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat,

check that the air bag has been deactivated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front

passenger air bag” at the end of the section).

The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the regula-

tions in force are respected.

1.46

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Child seat attached using the ISOFIX

mounting

ü Seat which allows an ISOFIX

child seat to be fitted.

± The rear seats are fitted with

an anchorage point which allows a

forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with

universal approval to be fitted. The an-

chorage points are located under the

luggage compartment carpet and are

indicated by a marking.

The size of the ISOFIX child seat is in-

dicated by a letter:

– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats

in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);

– C: rear-facing seats in group 1 (9 to

18 kg);

– D and E: shell seat or rear-facing

seats in group 0 or 0+ (less than

13 kg);

– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than

10 kg).

² Seat not suitable for fitting child

seats.

Child seat attached using the belt

¬ Seat which allows a child seat

with “Universal” approval to be attached

by a seat belt.

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (10/11)

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for

this vehicle will not correctly

protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

Visual installation of the

estate version (four seats)

³ Check the status of the air bag

before fitting a child seat or allowing a

passenger to use the seat.

− Seat which only allows a rear-

facing seat with “Universal” approval

to be attached with a seat belt.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before fitting a rear-facing child

seat in the front passenger seat, check that the air bag has been deacti-

vated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the

front passenger air bag” at the end of the paragraph).

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.47

ENG_UD25721_1

Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Type of child seat

estate version (four seats)

Weight of

the child

Seat size

ISOFIX

Front passenger

seat (1) (5) Rear side seats

Carrycot fitted across the ve-

hicle

Group 0

< 10 kg F - G X U - IL (2)

Shell seat/rear-facing seat

Group 0, or 0+ and 1

< 13 kg and 9 to

18 kg E, D, C U U - IL (3)

Forward-facing seat

Group 1 9 to 18 kg A, B, B1 X U - IUF - IL (4)

Booster seat

Group 2 and 3

15 to 25 kg and 22

to 36 kg X U (4)

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats.

U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.

IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal”/“semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be

attached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.

(1) Only a rear-facing child seat can be fitted in this seat: raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible,

tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).

(2) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest

the door.

(3) Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will

go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.

(4) Forward-facing child seat; position the seatback of the child seat in contact with the seatback of the vehicle seat. Adjust the

headrest, or remove it if necessary. Do not push the front seat more than halfway back on its runners and do not recline the

seatback more than 25°.

The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the regula-

tions in force are respected.

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat (11/11)

(5) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before installing a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat,

check that the air bag has been deactivated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front

passenger air bag” at the end of the section).

air bag

deactivating the front passenger air bags ........(current page)

front passenger air bag deactivation ..................... (current page)

child restraint/seat ................................(up to the end of the DU)

child safety............................................(up to the end of the DU)

child restraint/seat ................................(up to the end of the DU)

transporting children ............................. (up to the end of the DU)

1.48

ENG_UD18912_4

Sécurité enfants : désactivation/activation airbag passager avant (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag

Deactivating the front

passenger air bags

(on equipped vehicles)

You must deactivate certain devices

in addition to the front passenger seat

belt before fitting a child seat in the front

passenger seat.

To deactivate the air bags: with the

vehicle stationary, push and turn

lock 1 to the OFF position.

With the ignition on, it is essential to

check that warning light 2 ¹ is lit

on the central display and, depend-

ing on the vehicle, that the message

“Passenger airbag off” is displayed.

This light remains permanently lit to

let you know that you can fit a child

seat.

The passenger air bag must

only be deactivated or acti-

vated with the ignition off.

If it is interfered with when

the vehicle is being driven, indicator

lights å and © will come

on.

Switch the ignition off then on again

to reset the air bag in accordance

with the lock.

CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag (1/3)

1DANGER

Since operation of the front

passenger air bag is not

compatible with the position

of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER

fit a rear-facing child seat on a front

passenger seat with an active front

air bag. The child may suffer very

serious injuries if the air bag is trig-

gered.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.49

ENG_UD18912_4

Sécurité enfants : désactivation/activation airbag passager avant (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag (2/3)

DANGER

Since operation of the front

passenger air bag is not

compatible with the position

of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER

fit a rear-facing child seat on a front

passenger seat with an active front

air bag. The child may suffer very

serious injuries if the air bag is trig-

gered.

The markings on the dashboard and

labels A on each side of passenger sun

blind 3 (example: label shown above)

remind you of these instructions.

air bag

activating the front passenger air bags ............(current page)

1.50

ENG_UD18912_4

Sécurité enfants : désactivation/activation airbag passager avant (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag (3/3)

Operating faults

It is forbidden to fit a rear-facing child

seat to the front passenger seat if the

air bag activation/deactivation system

is faulty.

Allowing any other passenger to sit in

that seat is not recommended.

If warning lights › and ¹ are

lit at the same time.

Contact your approved dealer as soon

as possible.

Activating the front

passenger air bags

You should reactivate the air bag as

soon as you remove the child seat from

the front passenger seat to ensure the

protection of the front passenger in the

event of an impact.

To reactivate the air bags: when the

vehicle is stationary, push and turn

lock 1 to the ON position.

With the ignition on, it is essential to

check that warning light 4 › is lit

on the central display, and that it goes

out after a few seconds .

The passenger air bag must

only be deactivated or acti-

vated with the ignition off.

If it is interfered with when

the vehicle is being driven, indicator

lights å and © will come

on.

Switch the ignition off then on again

to reset the air bag in accordance

with the lock.

steering wheel

adjustment ...................................... (up to the end of the DU)

power-assisted steering........................(up to the end of the DU)

1.51

ENG_UD18894_3

Volant de direction (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Operating faults

The steering may become stiff when

driving or when the steering wheel is

turned repeatedly. This is due to the

power assistance overheating. In this

case, it must be allowed to cool down.

Power-assisted steering

Variable power-assisted steering

The variable power-assisted steering

system is equipped with an electronic

control system which alters the level of

assistance to suit the vehicle speed.

Steering is made easier during parking

manoeuvres (for added comfort) whilst

the force needed to steer increases

progressively as the speed rises (for

enhanced safety at high speeds).

Steering wheel

Power-assisted steering

STEERING WHEEL/POWER-ASSISTED STEERING

Height and reach adjustment

Pull lever 1 and move the steering

wheel to the required position.

Then, push the lever back fully, beyond

the point of resistance to lock the steer-

ing wheel.

Make sure that the steering wheel is

correctly locked.

For safety reasons, only

adjust the steering wheel

when the vehicle is station-

ary.

Never leave the steering wheel at

full lock while stationary.

Never switch off the igni-

tion when travelling down-

hill, and avoid doing so in

normal driving (assistance

is not provided).

With the engine switched off, or if

there is a system fault, it is still pos-

sible to turn the steering wheel. The

force required will be greater.

driver’s position .................................... (up to the end of the DU)

controls ................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

dashboard.............................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.52

ENG_UD6281_1

Poste de conduite direction à gauche (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Driving position

DRIVING POSITION: LEFT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)

1234 5 6 7 8910 11

25 23

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.53

ENG_UD6281_1

Poste de conduite direction à gauche (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

DRIVING POSITION: LEFT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)

1 Side air vent.

2 Side window demister outlet.

3 Stalk for:

– direction indicator lights,

– exterior lights,

– front fog lights,

– rear fog light.

4 Instrument panel.

5 Driver’s air bag and horn location.

6 – Steering column stalk for wind-

screen and rear screen wash/

wipe.

–

Trip computer information readout

control and vehicle settings person-

alisation menu.

7 Centre air vents.

The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

19 Gear lever.

20 Engine start/stop button and

RENAULT card reader.

21 Central door locking/unlocking con-

trols and hazard warning lights

switch.

22 Cruise control/speed limiter con-

trols.

23 Control for adjusting steering wheel

height and reach.

24 Bonnet release.

25 Controls for:

– electric headlight beam adjust-

ment,

– control instruments lighting rheo-

stat,

– activation/deactivation of the trac-

tion control,

– activation/deactivation of the

parking distance control system.

8 – Display of the time, tempera-

ture, radio information, navigation

system information, etc.

– Driver and front passenger seat

belt reminder warning light and

front passenger air bag activated/

deactivated warning lights.

9 Location for passenger air bag.

10 Side window demister outlet.

11 Side air vent.

12 Glove box.

13 Heating and ventilation controls.

14 Location for radio, navigation

system, etc.

15 Accessories socket.

16 Control for some multimedia equip-

ment.

17 Cruise control/speed limiter control.

18 Electronic parking brake or manual

parking brake control.

driver’s position .................................... (up to the end of the DU)

controls ................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

dashboard.............................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.54

ENG_UD6282_1

Poste de conduite direction à droite (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)

2 3 78

610

16 12

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.55

ENG_UD6282_1

Poste de conduite direction à droite (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)

The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

1 Side air vent.

2 Side window demister outlet.

3 Location for passenger air bag.

4 – Display (depending on the vehi-

cle) for time, temperature, radio

information, navigation system in-

formation, etc.

– Driver and front passenger seat

belt unfastened and passenger

air bag deactivated warning lights

5 Centre air vents.

6 Stalk for:

– direction indicator lights,

– exterior lights,

– front fog lights,

– rear fog light.

7 Location for driver’s air bag and

horn.

8 Instrument panel.

9 – Steering column stalk for wind-

screen and rear screen wash/

wipe,

–

Trip computer information readout

control and vehicle settings customi-

sation menu.

10 Side window demister outlet.

11 Side air vent.

12 Controls for:

– headlight beam height remote ad-

justment;

– lighting rheostat for control instru-

ments;

– activation/deactivation of the trac-

tion control;

– activation/deactivation of the

parking distance control system.

13 Cruise control/speed limiter controls

14 Control for adjusting steering wheel

height and reach.

15 Central door locking/unlocking con-

trols and hazard warning lights

switch.

16 Heating and ventilation controls.

17 Control for some multimedia equip-

ment.

18 Cruise control/speed limiter control.

19 Electronic parking brake or manual

parking brake control.

20 Gear lever.

21 Accessories socket.

22 Engine start/stop control and

RENAULT card reader.

23 Location for radio, navigation

system, etc.

24 Glove box.

25 Bonnet release.

instrument panel ................................... (up to the end of the DU)

warning lights........................................(up to the end of the DU)

driver’s position .................................... (up to the end of the DU)

trip computer and warning system........(up to the end of the DU)

indicators:

instrument panel ............................. (up to the end of the DU)

display ..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

operating faults ..................................... (up to the end of the DU)

control instruments ............................... (up to the end of the DU)

indicators ............................................................... (current page)

lights:

fog lights ..........................................................(current page)

lights:

dipped beam headlights ................................... (current page)

lights:

direction indicators ...........................................(current page)

lights:

main beam headlights ...................................... (current page)

handbrake..............................................................(current page)

fuel

filling ................................................................. (current page)

1.56

ENG_UD25633_1

Tableau de bord : témoins lumineux (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Control instruments

WARNING LIGHTS (1/4)

The warning light © means

you should drive very carefully to

an authorised dealer as soon as

possible. If you fail to follow this rec-

ommendation, you risk damaging

your vehicle.

Automatic main beam head-

light indicator light

Please refer to the information

on “External signals and lights” in

Section 1.

cLeft-hand direction indicator

tell-tale light

bRight-hand direction indica-

tor tell-tale light

}Handbrake “on” or elec-

tronic parking brake warn-

ing light

Refer to the information on the

“Handbrake” or “Electronic parking

brake” in Section 2.

uSide light tell-tale light

áMain beam headlight tell-tale

light

kDipped beam headlight tell-

tale light

gFront fog light tell-tale light

fRear fog light tell-tale light

If no lights or sounds are ap-

parent, this indicates a fault

in the instrument panel. This

indicates that it is essential

to stop immediately (as soon as traf-

fic conditions allow). Ensure that the

vehicle is correctly immobilised and

contact an approved Dealer.

Warning light ® re-

quires you to stop immedi-

ately, for your own safety,

as soon as traffic conditions allow.

Switch off the engine and do not re-

start it. Contact an approved Dealer.

The instrument panel A lights up

when the ignition is switched on. You

can adjust the brightness of the instru-

ment panel by turning control knob 1.

In some cases, the appearance of a

warning light is accompanied by a mes-

sage.

The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

ABS .......................................................................(current page)

air bag....................................................................(current page)

variable power-assisted steering ........................... (current page)

filter

particle filter .....................................................(current page)

speed limiter .......................................................... (current page)

cruise control ......................................................... (current page)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.57

ENG_UD25633_1

Tableau de bord : témoins lumineux (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

WARNING LIGHTS (2/4)

xAnti-lock braking warning

light

This lights up when the ignition is

switched on and goes out after a few

seconds.

If it does not go out after the ignition is

switched on, or lights up when driving,

there is a fault with the ABS. Braking

will then be as normal, without the ABS.

Contact an approved Dealer as soon as

possible.

ÄToxic Fume Filter System

Warning Light

This lights up when the ignition is

switched on and goes out when the

engine is started.

– If it lights up continuously, consult

your approved Dealer as soon as

possible;

– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed

until the light stops flashing. Contact

your approved Dealer as soon as

possible.

Refer to the information on

“Antipollution, fuel economy and driv-

ing” in Section 2.

©Warning light

This lights up when the ignition

is switched on and goes out as soon as

the engine is started. It can light up in

conjunction with other indicator lights

and/or messages on the instrument

panel.

It means you should drive very care-

fully to an authorised dealer as soon

as possible. If you fail to follow this rec-

ommendation, you risk damaging your

vehicle.

åAir bag warning light

This comes on when the igni-

tion is switched on and goes out after a

few seconds.

If it does not light up when the ignition

is switched on, or comes on when the

engine is running, there is a fault in the

system.

Contact your approved Dealer as soon

as possible.

ÉPreheating warning light

(diesel version)

This should come on when the igni-

tion is switched on. It indicates that the

heater plugs are in operation. This goes

out as soon as the engine starts.

ÎSpeed limiter and cruise

control warning light

See the information on the “Speed lim-

iter” and “Cruise control” in Section 2.

\[ Fuel economy indica-

tor light

This lights up to advise you to change

to a higher gear (up arrow) or lower

gear (down arrow).

The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

warning buzzer ...................................................... (current page)

battery....................................................................(current page)

seat belts ............................................................... (current page)

engine oil ............................................................... (current page)

1.58

ENG_UD25633_1

Tableau de bord : témoins lumineux (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

WARNING LIGHTS (3/4)

ÀOil pressure warning light

If it comes on when you are

driving accompanied by the ®

warning light and a beep, it is essen-

tial to stop and switch off the ignition.

Check the oil level (refer to the informa-

tion on “Engine oil level” in Section 4).

If the level is normal, the light has come

on for another reason: contact an au-

thorised dealer.

DBrake circuit fault warning

light

If it comes on during braking and is ac-

companied by the ® warning light

and a beep, it indicates that the fluid

level in the circuit is low or that there is

a braking system fault. Stop as soon as

traffic conditions allow and contact an

approved Dealer.

®STOP light

This lights up when the ignition

is switched on and goes out as soon as

the engine is started. It comes on with

other warning lights and/or messages,

and is accompanied by a beep.

It requires you to stop immediately, for

your own safety, as soon as traffic con-

ditions allow. Switch off the engine and

do not restart it.

Contact an approved Dealer.

ÔEngine coolant temperature

warning light

This lights up when the ignition is

switched on and goes out when the

engine is started. If it comes on when

you are driving accompanied by the

® warning light and a beep, it is

essential to stop and switch off the ig-

nition.

Check the coolant level (refer to the in-

formation on “Levels” in Section 4). If

the level is correct, the light has come

on for another reason; consult an ap-

proved dealer.

ÚBattery charge warning light

If it comes on together with the

® warning light and a beep, it in-

dicates that the electrical circuit is over-

charged or undercharged.

The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.59

ENG_UD25633_1

Tableau de bord : témoins lumineux (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

ßFront seat belt reminder

warning light

This lights up on the central display

when starting the engine then, if the

driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt

(if this seat is occupied) is not fastened

and the vehicle has reached approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h), it flashes and

a bleep sounds for around 120 sec-

onds.

Note: an object placed on the passen-

ger seat base may activate the warning

light in some cases.

Rear seat belt reminder (depending

on vehicle)

the ß warning light on the cen-

tral display lights up accompanied by a

message on the instrument panel indi-

cating the number of seat belts buck-

led for approximately 30 seconds each

time:

– the vehicle is started;

– a door is opened;

– a rear seat belt is fastened or unfas-

tened.

Check that the rear passengers are

wearing seat belts and that the number

of seat belt shown as fastened corre-

sponds to the number of rear bench

seat places occupied.

WARNING LIGHTS (4/4)

ðHeated seats operating indi-

cator

This indicates that one of the heated

seats is in operation.

LLow fuel level warning light

This comes on when the igni-

tion is switched on and goes out after a

few seconds. If it comes on when driv-

ing accompanied by a beep, fill up with

fuel as soon as possible. There is only

approximately 30 miles (50 km) worth

of fuel left after the warning light first

comes on.

ÜNot used

ùDriving correction device

warning light

Refer to information on “Driver correc-

tion devices and aids” in Section 2.

Lane departure system

warning light

Please refer to the information on “Lane

departure warning” in Section 2.

The presence and operation of the warning lights DEPEND ON THE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

indicators:

instrument panel ............................. (up to the end of the DU)

display ..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

instrument panel ................................... (up to the end of the DU)

fuel level ................................................................(current page)

coolant ................................................................... (current page)

control instruments ............................... (up to the end of the DU)

levels:

fuel ...................................................................(current page)

levels:

coolant ............................................................. (current page)

1.60

ENG_UD18928_3

Tableau de bord : afficheurs et indicateurs (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (1/2)

Rev counter 1 (rpm × 1 000)

Fuel level gauge 5

If the minimum level is reached, in-

dicator light 6 comes on and a beep

sounds. Fill up as soon as possible.

There is only approximately 30 miles

(50 km) worth of fuel left after the warn-

ing light first comes on.

Coolant temperature indicator 4

In normal use, indicator 4 should be

before area a. Under severe condi-

tions, the needle may enter this area.

This is not serious unless the ®

warning light comes on, accompanied

by a message on the instrument panel

and a beep.

Trip computer and warning system

Refer to the information on the “Trip

computer and warning system” in

Section 1.

Engine oil level low warning

When the engine is started, display 3

alerts the driver when the oil level is

at its minimum. Refer to Section 4:

“Engine oil level”.

The first time the alert appears, it can

be cleared by pressing one of the but-

tons on the end of stalk 2.

Subsequent warnings will disappear

automatically after 30 seconds.

56 4

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.61

ENG_UD18928_3

Tableau de bord : afficheurs et indicateurs (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Instrument panel in miles

(option to switch to km/h)

– With the ignition off, press one of the

buttons 9 or 10 at the end of stalk 2

and start button 8;

– the speedometer unit indicator

flashes for approximately ten sec-

onds, then the new unit is displayed:

release button 9 or 10 when the unit

stops flashing.

To return to the previous mode, repeat

the same operation.

Note: once the battery is switched off,

the trip computer and warning system

automatically returns to the original unit

of measurement.

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (2/2)

Speedometer 7 (mph or km/h)

Overspeed buzzer

Depending on the vehicle and country,

a buzzer sounds for approximately 10

seconds every 40 seconds, as long as

the vehicle is travelling in excess of 72

mph (120 km/h).

control instruments ............................... (up to the end of the DU)

indicators:

instrument panel ............................. (up to the end of the DU)

trip computer and warning system........(up to the end of the DU)

instrument panel ................................... (up to the end of the DU)

warning lights........................................(up to the end of the DU)

instrument panel messages..................(up to the end of the DU)

1.62

ENG_UD23628_4

Ordinateur de bord : généralités (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - L38 - X38 - X32 - B32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

trip computer

Trip computer and warning

system 1

Depending on the vehicle, this includes

the following functions:

– distance travelled;

– journey parameters;

– information messages;

– operating fault messages (con-

nected to the warning light ©);

– warning messages (connected to the

® warning light);

– vehicle settings customisation menu.

All these functions are described on the

following pages.

Display selection keys 2

and 3

Scroll through the following informa-

tion upwards (button 2) or downwards

(button 3) by pressing briefly and suc-

cessively (the display depends on the

vehicle equipment and country).

a) total mileage and trip mileage re-

corder;

b) journey parameters:

– fuel used;

– average fuel consumption;

– current fuel consumption;

– estimated range;

– distance travelled;

– average speed;

c) mileage before service;

d) tyre pressure monitor;

e) vehicle settings customisation menu;

f) trip log, operating faults and informa-

tion message readout.

TRIP COMPUTER: general information (1/2)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.63

ENG_UD23628_4

Ordinateur de bord : généralités (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - L38 - X38 - X32 - B32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Trip mileage resetting

With “trip mileage recorder” selected on

the display, press button 2 or 3 until the

mileage recorder resets to zero.

Resetting the journey

parameters (reset button)

With one of the journey parameters se-

lected on the display, press button 2

or 3 until the display resets.

Interpreting some of the

values displayed after

resetting

The values showing average fuel con-

sumption, range and average speed

will become more stable and reliable

the further you travel after pressing the

reset button.

For the first few miles after pressing

the reset key you will notice that the

range increases as you travel. This

range takes into account the average

fuel consumption since the last time the

reset button was pressed. Therefore,

the average fuel consumption may de-

crease when:

– the vehicle stops accelerating;

– the engine reaches its operating

temperature (if the engine was cold

when the reset key was pressed);

– when driving from an urban area

onto the open road.

Automatic resetting of the

journey parameters

Resetting occurs automatically when

the maximum value of any of the pa-

rameters is exceeded.

TRIP COMPUTER: general information (2/2)

trip computer and warning system........(up to the end of the DU)

warning lights........................................(up to the end of the DU)

instrument panel messages..................(up to the end of the DU)

instrument panel ................................... (up to the end of the DU)

1.64

ENG_UD25631_1

Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

101668 KM

112. 4 KM a) Total mileage and trip mileage recorder.

FUEL USED Fuel used b) Journey parameters.

Fuel used.

Fuel consumed since the last reset.

8.5 L

20 L

AVERAGE Average Average fuel consumption since the last reset.

The value is displayed after having travelled at least

400 metres since the last reset.

7.2 L/100

TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (1/5)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.65

ENG_UD25631_1

Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (2/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

CURRENT Current Current fuel consumption.

This value is displayed above a speed of approximately 18

mph (30 km/h).

9.4 L/100

Estimated range with remaining fuel.

This range takes into account the average fuel consumption

since the last time the reset button was pressed. The value

is displayed after driving 400 metres.

RANGE Range

541 km

Distance travelled since the last reset.

DISTANCE Distance

52.2 km

359 km

Average speed since the last reset.

The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.

AVERAGE Average

89.6 km/h

1.66

ENG_UD25631_1

Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (3/5)

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

c) Mileage before oil change.

Distance remaining until the next oil change (displayed in

miles/kilometres and months), then when the time nears,

several scenarios are possible:

– distance/time remaining less than 900 miles (1,500

km) or one month: the message “Schedule Oil Chg

in” or “Oil change in” is displayed accompanied by the

nearest term (distance or time);

– range equal to 0 km/miles or service date reached:

the message “Oil changerequired” is displayed accom-

panied by warning light ©.

The vehicle requires an oil change as soon as possible.

Oil change in

30000km/24 MONTHS

Schedule Oil

Chg in 100km

Schedule Oil Chg

in 10 days

NB: depending on the vehicle, the mileage before an oil change varies according to the driving style (frequent driving at low

speed, door-to-door journeys, extensive use at idle speed, towing a trailer etc.). The distance remaining until the next oil change

can therefore decrease more quickly in some cases than the actual distance travelled.

The oil change intervals are independent of the vehicle’s maintenance schedule: please refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance

Booklet.

Resetting: to reset the mileage before an oil change, press and hold one of the display reset buttons for approximately 10 sec-

onds until the display shows the range permanently.

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.67

ENG_UD25631_1

Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (4/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

d) Tyre pressure monitor

Refer to the information on the “Tyre pressure monitor”

in Section 2.

FRONT TYRES

2.2 2.2

REAR TYRES

2.2 2.2

1.68

ENG_UD25631_1

Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (5/5)

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

e) Vehicle settings customisation menu.

Enables certain vehicle functions to be set (instrument panel language, parking

distance control, etc.). Refer to the information on “Vehicle settings customisation

menu” in Section 1.

Settings menu:

press and hold

f) Trip log.

Successive display:

– information messages (passenger airbag OFF etc.),

– operating fault messages (check the injection system, etc.).

No message available

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

trip computer and warning system.........................(current page)

warning lights.........................................................(current page)

instrument panel messages...................................(current page)

instrument panel .................................................... (current page)

1.69

ENG_UD25634_1

Ordinateur de bord : messages d’information (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: information messages

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected

“Battery low start engine” Indicates that the vehicle must be started to recharge the battery (eg. after the engine has been

switched off for some time whilst listening to the radio).

“Please remove keycard” Request to remove the RENAULT card from the reader when you leave the vehicle.

“Checking control

functions” Displayed with the ignition on when the vehicle is running self-diagnostics.

“Traction control off” Indicates that you have deactivated the ASR function.

“Turn steeringwheel

+ START”

Turn the steering wheel slightly whilst pressing the vehicle start button to unlock the steering

column.

« Auto stop » Indicates that the engine is on standby (related to the Stop and Start function – please see the in-

formation on “Stop and Start Function” in Section 2).

“Steering wheel

not locked” Indicates that the steering column has not been locked.

“Stop vehicle” Indicates an electronic parking brake fault. Apply the electronic parking brake manually and ensure

that the vehicle is immobilised using a chock.

These can help in the vehicle starting phase, or give information about a selection or a driving status.

Examples of information messages are given in the following pages.

trip computer and warning system.........................(current page)

instrument panel messages...................................(current page)

warning lights.........................................................(current page)

instrument panel .................................................... (current page)

1.70

ENG_UD23626_1

Ordinateur de bord : messages d’anomalies de fonctionnement (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: operating fault messages

These appear with the © warning light and mean that you should drive very carefully to an authorised dealer as

soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.

They disappear when the display selection key is pressed or after several seconds and are stored in the computer log. The ©

warning light stays on. Examples of operating fault messages are given in the following pages.

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected

“Clean diesel filter” Indicates the presence of water in the diesel filter.

“Check lighting” Indicates a fault in the directional headlights.

“Check vehicle” Indicates a fault on one of the pedal sensors or in the battery management

system.

“Check airbag” Indicates a fault in the restraint system in addition to the seat belts. In the event

of an accident, it is possible that they may not be triggered.

“Check antipollution system” Indicates a fault in the vehicle’s particle filter system.

“Check injection” Indicates an engine fault.

trip computer and warning system.........................(current page)

warning lights.........................................................(current page)

instrument panel messages...................................(current page)

instrument panel .................................................... (current page)

1.71

ENG_UD23627_1

Ordinateur de bord : messages d’alerte (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: warning message

These appear with the ® warning light and require you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic

conditions allow. Stop your engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.

Examples of warning messages are given in the following pages. Note: the messages appear on the display either individually

or alternately (when there are several messages to be displayed), and may be accompanied by a warning light and/or a beep.

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected

“Engine failure hazard” Indicates engine overheating, or an injection or engine oil pressure fault.

“Power steering fault” or

“Risk of steering locking” Indicates a fault in the steering.

“Parking brake fault” Indicates an electronic parking brake fault. Apply the electronic parking brake manually

and ensure that the vehicle is immobilised using a chock.

“Battery charging fault” Indicates a fault in the vehicle battery charging circuit (alternator etc.).

“Puncture” Indicates a puncture on the tyre displayed on the instrument panel.

menu for customising the vehicle settings (up to the end of the DU)

customising the vehicle settings ........... (up to the end of the DU)

customised vehicle settings ..................(up to the end of the DU)

1.72

ENG_UD25654_1

Menu de personnalisation des réglages du véhicule (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

vehicle settings customisation menu

VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU

j) Parking sensor volume;

k) Language.

= function activated

< function deactivated

Once a line has been selected, keep

pressing button 2 or 3 to change the

function. If you select either “Parking

sensor volume” or “Language”, you will

have to make a further selection (sound

volume of the parking sensor or instru-

ment panel language). In this case,

make your selection and confirm it by

holding either button 2 or 3, the value

selected is shown by a ~ in front

of the line.

To exit the menu, select “EXIT” or

“BACK” then confirm by holding either

button 2 or 3. It may be necessary to

carry out this operation several times.

On equipped vehicles, this function,

which is integrated in the trip compu-

ter and warning system 1, allows you

to activate/deactivate some of the vehi-

cle’s functions.

Accessing the settings

customisation menu

With the vehicle stationary, press

either button 2 or 3 until the mes-

sage “Settings menu: press and hold”

appears on display 1. Press either

button 2 or 3 for longer than 2 seconds

to enter the menu.

Adjusting the settings

Press one of buttons 2 or 3 to select a

function to change:

a) Auto door locking while driving;

b) Unlock driver’s door only;

c) Auto rear wipe with reverse gear;

d) automatic daytime running lights

function;

e) Front parking sensor;

f) Automatic main beam lights;

g) Lane deviation volume;

h) Lane deviation sensitivity ;

i) Rear parking sensor; The vehicle settings personalisation

menu cannot be used when driv-

ing. At speed exceeding 12 mph

(20 km/h), the instrumental panel

display switches automatically back

to trip computer and warning system

mode.

clock .....................................................(up to the end of the DU)

external temperature ............................(up to the end of the DU)

indicators:

exterior temperature indicator ..........................(current page)

1.73

ENG_UD6287_1

Heure et température extérieure (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Clock and external temperature

The time and, depending on the vehi-

cle, the exterior temperature are dis-

played.

Resetting the clock 1

On equipped vehicles, buttons 2 and 3

are used to set the clock.

Press button 2 to adjust the hours and

button 3 to adjust the minutes.

External temperature

indicator

As ice formation is related

to climatic exposure, local

air humidity and temperature, the

external temperature alone is not

sufficient to detect ice.

CLOCK AND EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE

If the electrical supply is cut (battery

disconnected, broken supply wire,

etc.), the clock will lose its time set-

ting.

The time must then be set.

We recommend that you do not

adjust these settings while driving.

External temperature

indicator

Special note:

When the external temperature is be-

tween –3°C and +3°C, the °C charac-

ters flash (indicates risk of ice forma-

tion).

Vehicles equipped with a

navigation system, radio, etc.

For vehicles which are not fitted with

buttons 2 and 3, refer to the specific

equipment instructions to discover the

special features.

1 2

rear view mirrors ................................... (up to the end of the DU)

1.74

ENG_UD21504_2

Rétroviseurs (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Door mirrors

Folding door mirrors

The door mirrors automatically fold in

when the vehicle is locked (switch 2 in

position B). In this case, they will fold

out when the ignition is next switched

on.

In any case, you can make the door

mirrors fold in (switch 2 in position C) or

fold out (switch 2 in position A).

Automatic mode is then deactivated. To

reactivate it, position switch 2 to B.

REAR VIEW MIRRORS

Door mirrors

Adjustment

Select the door mirror using switch 3,

then use button 1 to adjust it to the de-

sired position.

Heated door mirrors

Mirror de-icing is carried out at the

same time as rear screen de-icing.

The driver’s door mirror

may have two clearly de-

fined zones. Zone E shows

what can normally be seen

in an ordinary rear view mirror.

Zone D increases rear side visibility.

The objects in zone D look much

further away than they really are.

Interior rear view mirror

Its position can be adjusted.

Rear view mirror with lever 4

When driving at night, to avoid being

dazzled by the headlights of the vehicle

behind, depress the little lever located

behind rear view mirror 4.

Rear view mirror without lever 4

The rear view mirror darkens automati-

cally at night if you are being followed

by a vehicle with its lights on.

D E

warning buzzer ..................................... (up to the end of the DU)

headlight flashers .................................(up to the end of the DU)

indicators .............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

lights:

hazard warning ............................... (up to the end of the DU)

lights:

direction indicators ..........................(up to the end of the DU)

indicators:

direction indicators ..........................(up to the end of the DU)

hazard warning lights signal ................. (up to the end of the DU)

horn ......................................................(up to the end of the DU)

horn:

flash .................................................................(current page)

horn:

sounding the horn ............................................ (current page)

horn .......................................................................(current page)

audible and visual signals.....................(up to the end of the DU)

1.75

ENG_UD25635_1

Avertisseurs sonores et lumineux (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Audible and visual signals

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS

Horn

Press on the sides of the steering wheel

boss A.

Headlight flasher

Pull stalk 1 towards you to flash the

headlights.

éHazard warning lights

Press switch 2. This switch ac-

tivates all four direction indicators and

the side indicator lights simultaneously.

It must only be used in an emergency to

warn drivers of other vehicles that you

have had to stop in an area where stop-

ping is prohibited or unexpected or that

you are obliged to drive under special

conditions.

Depending on the vehicle, the hazard

warning lights may come on automati-

cally under heavy deceleration. You can

switch them off by pressing switch 2.

Direction indicators

Move stalk 1 parallel to the steering

wheel and in the direction you are going

to turn it.

One-touch mode

When driving, it is possible that the

steering wheel may not be turned suf-

ficiently to return the stalk automatically

to its starting position.

In this case, briefly turn stalk 1 to the in-

termediate position, then release it: the

stalk returns to its original point and the

indicator light flashes three times.

lighting:

exterior ............................................(up to the end of the DU)

instrument panel .................................................... (current page)

lights:

side lights .........................................................(current page)

lights:

dipped beam headlights ................................... (current page)

hazard warning lights signal .................................. (current page)

signals and lights .................................. (up to the end of the DU)

lighting:

instrument panel .............................................. (current page)

daytime running lights............................................(current page)

1.76

ENG_UD25638_1

Eclairages et signalisations extérieurs (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Daytime running lights

function

Depending on the vehicle, the daytime

running lights come on automatically

when the engine is started. To activate

or deactivate this function, refer to the

information on the “Vehicle settings

customisation menu” in Section 1.

áMain beam headlights

With the dipped beam head-

lights lit, pull stalk 1 towards you. This

indicator light on the instrument panel

comes on.

To return to the dipped headlight posi-

tion, pull stalk 1 towards you again.

Exterior lighting and signals

Before driving at night,

check that the electrical

equipment is operating cor-

rectly and adjust the head-

light beams (if your vehicle is not

carrying its normal load). As a gen-

eral precaution, check that the lights

are not obscured (by dirt, mud,

snow or objects being transported).

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (1/4)

uSide lights

Turn the ring 2 until the symbol

is opposite mark 3. This indicator light

on the instrument panel comes on.

kDipped beam

headlights

Manual operation

Turn the ring 2 until the symbol is oppo-

site mark 3. This indicator light on the

instrument panel comes on.

Automatic operation

(depending on vehicle)

Turn ring 2 until the AUTO symbol is op-

posite mark 3: with the engine running,

the dipped beam headlights switch on

or off automatically depending on the

brightness of the light outside, without

any action on stalk 1.

If driving on the left in a left-hand

drive vehicle (or vice versa), drivers

must have the lights adjusted by an

authorised dealer for the duration of

the trip.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.77

ENG_UD25638_1

Eclairages et signalisations extérieurs (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Automatic main beam

headlights

This system switches the main beam

headlights on and off automatically. The

function uses a camera located behind

the interior rear-view mirror to detect

vehicles that are following and coming

in the opposite direction.

The main beam headlights come on au-

tomatically if:

– exterior light is weak;

– no other vehicles or lighting are de-

tected;

– the vehicle speed is above approxi-

mately 30 mph (45 km/h).

If any of the above conditions are not

fulfilled, the system switches to dipped

beam headlights.

The “automatic main beam headlights” system should under no circum-

stances be used to replace driver attention and responsibility with regard

to vehicle lighting and adapting to light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Using the portable naviga-

tion system at night in the

windscreen area below the

camera may disturb the op-

eration of the “automatic main beam

headlights” system (risk of reflection

on the windscreen).

Activation

Turn ring 2 until the AUTO symbol is op-

posite mark 3.

Pull stalk 1 to activate main beam

headlights.

Warning light  comes on the in-

strument panel.

Deactivation

– pull stalk 1 again;

– turn ring 2 to a position other than

AUTO.

Warning light  goes out on the in-

strument panel.

Operating faults

When the message “Check main beam

lights” appears on the instrument panel,

the system is deactivated.

Consult an approved dealer.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (2/4)

Turning on the fog lights deactivates

the system and prevents it from

being activated.

The system may encounter difficul-

ties under certain conditions, includ-

ing:

– extreme weather conditions (rain,

snow, fog, etc.);

– obstruction in front of the wind-

screen or camera;

– when a following or oncoming ve-

hicle has weak or hidden lighting;

– incorrect settings for the front

headlights;

– reflecting systems.

lights:

main beam headlights ...................................... (current page)

warning buzzer ...................................................... (current page)

see-me-home lighting ............................................ (current page)

lights

mobile directional .............................................(current page)

1.78

ENG_UD25638_1

Eclairages et signalisations extérieurs (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (3/4)

Special note:

– If the dipped beam headlights are

manually switched on and if the light

is sufficient, the directional head-

lights will remain fixed;

– If the lights come on automatically

when cornering, the directional

headlights will start working from the

next time the vehicle corners;

– When the dipped beam headlights

are switched on with the engine

running and the vehicle stationary,

the lights move to reinitialise them-

selves. If not, there is a system fault.

Switching off the lights

There are two possibilities:

– Manually, move ring 2 to position 0;

– automatically, the lights will go out

when the engine is switched off, the

driver’s door is opened or the vehicle

is locked. In this case, the next time

the engine is started the lights will be

switched back on according to the

position of the ring 2.

NB: if the fog lights are lit, the lights are

not switched off automatically.

“See-me-home lighting”

function

This function allows you to briefly switch

on the dipped beam headlights (to pro-

vide light when opening a gate, etc.).

With the engine and lights off and

ring 2 in the 0 position, pull stalk 1 to-

wards you: the dipped beam headlights

light up for approximately thirty sec-

onds. To increase this duration, you

may pull the stalk up to four times (total

time restricted to two minutes). The

message “See-me-home _ _ _” along

with the times the lights will be on for

is displayed on the instrument panel to

confirm this action.

To switch off the lights before they go

out automatically, turn ring 2 to any po-

sition, then return it to position 0.

Directional headlights

Depending on the vehicle, with the

dipped beam headlights on and under

certain conditions (speed, steering

wheel angle, forwards gear selected,

etc.) when cornering, the dipped beam

headlights move to light the inside of

the bend.

Operating faults

When the message “Check lighting”,

accompanied by the © warning

light is displayed on the instrument

panel, there is a lighting fault.

Consult an approved dealer.

lights:

fog lights ..........................................................(current page)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.79

ENG_UD25638_1

Eclairages et signalisations extérieurs (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (4/4)

When driving in fog or snow, or

when transporting objects which are

higher than the roof, the headlights

do not come on automatically.

Switching on the fog lights remains

the responsibility of the driver: the

indicator lights on the instrument

panel inform you whether the fog

lights are lit (indicator light on) or not

(indicator light not on).

gFront fog lights

Turn centre ring 5 on stalk 1

until the symbol faces mark 6, then re-

lease it.

Operation of the fog lights depends on

the exterior lighting position selected,

and an indicator light will light up on the

instrument panel.

fRear fog light

Turn centre ring 5 on the stalk

until the symbol faces mark 6, then re-

lease it.

Operation of the fog lights depends on

the exterior lighting selected, and an in-

dicator light will light up on the instru-

ment panel.

To avoid inconveniencing other road

users, remember to switch off the rear

fog light when it is no longer needed.

Lights-on reminder buzzer

If the lights are on after the engine is

switched off, a warning beep sounds

when the driver’s door is opened to

warn you that the lights are still on.

Switching off the lights

Turn ring 5 again until mark 6 is oppo-

site the symbol for the fog light that you

wish to switch off. The corresponding

indicator light on the instrument panel

goes out.

The front and rear fog lights switch off

when the exterior lights are switched

off.

electric beam height adjustment ........... (up to the end of the DU)

see-me-home lighting ........................... (up to the end of the DU)

lights:

adjusting .........................................(up to the end of the DU)

lights

adjustment ...................................... (up to the end of the DU)

signals and lights .................................. (up to the end of the DU)

headlight beam adjustment .................. (up to the end of the DU)

1.80

ENG_UD25636_2

Réglage électrique de la hauteur des faisceaux (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)

ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Headlight beam adjustment

On vehicles fitted with this function,

control A allows you to adjust the height

of the beams according to the load.

Turn control A downwards to lower the

headlights and upwards to raise them.

For vehicles not fitted with control A,

adjustment is automatic.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM HEIGHT

Examples of positions for adjusting

control A according to the load

Five door Three door

Driver alone or with front

passenger 0 0

Driver with one front

passenger and one rear

passenger

0 0

Driver with one front

passenger and two or three

rear passengers

1 1

Driver with one front

passenger, three rear

passengers and luggage

3 3

If driving on the left in a left-hand

drive vehicle (or vice versa), drivers

must have the lights adjusted by an

authorised dealer for the duration of

the trip.

wipers ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

windscreen washer/wiper ..................... (up to the end of the DU)

windscreen washer ...............................(up to the end of the DU)

1.81

ENG_UD17355_4

Essuie-vitre / lave-vitre avant (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Wash/Wipe

Vehicle fitted with front

windscreen wiper rain sensor

A park

B automatic wiper function.

When this position is selected, the

system detects water on the wind-

screen and triggers the wipers at a

suitable wiping speed. It is possi-

ble to change the triggering thresh-

old and the time sweeps by turning

ring 2:

– E: minimum sensitivity

– F: maximum sensitivity

note: in foggy weather or during

snowfalls, the wiping is not automati-

cally triggered and remains under

the driver’s control.

C normal wiping speed

D fast wiping speed

Special note

When driving the vehicle, the wiping

speed slows down whenever the ve-

hicle stops. For example, fast wiping

speed will slow to normal wiping speed.

As soon as the vehicle moves off,

wiping will return to the speed originally

selected.

If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and

cancels the automatic function.

Vehicle fitted with intermittent

windscreen wipers

A park

B intermittent wiping

The wipers will pause for several

seconds between sweeps. It is

possible to change the time be-

tween sweeps by turning ring 2.

C normal wiping speed

D fast wiping speed

WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (1/2)

For all vehicles, position C can be

accessed with the ignition on and

positions B and D can only be ac-

cessed with the engine running.

headlight washer ...................................................(current page)

1.82

ENG_UD17355_4

Essuie-vitre / lave-vitre avant (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Headlight washers

Headlights on

On equipped vehicles, hold stalk 1

pulled towards you for about 1 second,

and the headlight washers and wind-

screen washers will be activated at the

same time.

Note: when the minimum windscreen

washer fluid level is reached, the head-

light washer system may be deprimed.

Fill the windscreen washer fluid and

then activate the windscreen washer,

with the engine running, to reprime

the system.

Before any action on the

windscreen (washing the

vehicle, de-icing, cleaning

the windscreen, etc.) return

stalk 1 to position A (park).

Risk of injury and/or damage.

Windscreen washer

With the ignition on, pull stalk 1 then

release.

A brief pull will trigger a single sweep

of the wipers, in addition to the wind-

screen washer.

A longer pull will trigger three sweeps

of the wipers followed, a few seconds

later, by a fourth, in addition to the wind-

screen washer.

WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (2/2)

In freezing or snowy weather, ensure

they are not stuck to the windscreen

(including the central area located

behind the interior rear-view mirror)

and the rear screen before starting

the wipers (risk of motor overheat-

ing).

When working in the engine

compartment, ensure that

the windscreen wiper stalk

is in position A (park).

Risk of injury.

screen wash/wipe ................................. (up to the end of the DU)

windscreen washer ...............................(up to the end of the DU)

wipers ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

1.83

ENG_UD11879_3

Essuie-vitre / lave-vitre arrière (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

REAR SCREEN WASH/WIPE

Check the condition of the wiper

blades. You are responsible for their

service life:

– they must remain clean: clean

the blades, windscreen and

rear screen regularly with soapy

water;

– do not use them when the wind-

screen or rear screen are dry;

– free them from the windscreen or

rear screen when they have not

been used for a long time.

In all cases, replace them as soon

as they begin to lose efficiency: ap-

proximately once a year.

Before using the rear wiper, check

that no object obstructs the travel of

the blade.

Do not use the wiper arm to open or

close the tailgate.

pRear screen washer/

wiper

With the ignition on, push the stalk.

YRear screen wiper

With the ignition on, turn ring A

on stalk 1 to align the symbol with

mark 2 then release it.

To stop the operation, pivot ring A

again.

Wiping frequency varies with vehicle

speed.

fuel tank capacity ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

fuel

filling ................................................ (up to the end of the DU)

fuel

grade ............................................... (up to the end of the DU)

fuel tank

capacity ........................................... (up to the end of the DU)

fuel

capacity ............................................................ (current page)

fuel filler cap .........................................(up to the end of the DU)

1.84

ENG_UD25637_1

Réservoir carburant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Vehicles running on ethanol-based

fuel

It is essential to use unleaded petrol or

fuel containing a maximum of 85% eth-

anol (E85).

In very cold conditions, it may be very

difficult or even impossible to start the

engine. To avoid this problem, use un-

leaded petrol or, on equipped vehicles,

use the heater integrated in the engine:

connect the special end of the exten-

sion piece supplied into the socket in-

tegrated into the radiator grille and the

other end into a 220V socket for at least

6 hours before starting.

Note: you may notice an increase in

fuel consumption with this type of fuel

Useable fuel tank capacity:

59 litres approximately.

With the vehicle unlocked, to open the

compartment B, place your finger into

the recess C.

Valve A is integrated into the filler pipe.

For details on filling the fuel tank, refer

to the information on “Filling with fuel”.

To close it, press on the fuel filler flap by

hand, as far as it will go.

Fuel grade

Use a high-grade fuel that complies

with the legislation in force in each

country and which must conform to the

specifications given on the label on the

cover B. Refer to the information on

“Engine specifications” in Section 6.

Diesel versions

It is essential to use diesel fuel that

conforms with the information given on

the label inside cover B.

Petrol versions

It is essential to use unleaded petrol.

The octane rating (RON) must conform

to the specifications on the label inside

fuel filler flap B. Refer to the information

on “Engine specifications” in Section 6.

Fuel tank (filling with fuel)

FUEL TANK (1/3)

Never press valve A with your fingers.

Do not wash the filler area with a high pressure washer.

Do not mix even small

amounts of petrol (un-

leaded or E85) with diesel.

Do not use ethanol-based

fuel if your vehicle is not compatible

with this fuel.

Do not add additive to the fuel –

otherwise you risk damaging the

engine.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

1.85

ENG_UD25637_1

Réservoir carburant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

Filling with fuel

With the ignition off, insert the nozzle to

open valve A and insert it fully before

turning it on to fill the fuel tank (risk of

splashing).

Keep the nozzle in this position through-

out the entire filling operation.

When the pump cuts out automatically

at the end of the filling procedure, a

maximum of two further filling attempts

may be made, as there must be suffi-

cient space in the fuel tank to allow for

expansion.

Make sure that no water enters the fuel

tank during filling. The valve A and its

surround must remain clean.

Petrol versions

Using leaded petrol will damage the

antipollution system and may lead to a

loss of warranty.

To ensure that the fuel tank is not filled

with leaded petrol, the fuel tank filler

neck contains a restrictor fitted with a

foolproof system which only allows

the nozzle for unleaded petrol to be

used (at the pump).

FUEL TANK (2/3)

Persistent smell of

fuel

If you notice a persistent

smell of fuel you should:

– stop the vehicle as soon as traf-

fic conditions allow and switch off

the ignition;

– switch on the hazard warning

lights and ask your passengers

to leave the vehicle and to keep

away from traffic;

– contact an approved Dealer.

Vehicle fitted with the Stop and

Start function

To fill up with fuel, the engine must

be stopped (and not on standby):

stop the engine by pressing the

engine stop button 1 (please refer

to the information on “Starting and

stopping the engine” in Section 2).

1.86

ENG_UD25637_1

Réservoir carburant (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_1

No modifications what-

soever are permitted on

any part of the fuel supply

system (computers, wiring,

fuel circuit, injector, protection

covers, etc.) as this may be danger-

ous (such work must be undertaken

by qualified Network personnel).

Running out of fuel on diesel

versions

Vehicles with priming bulb 2

After a breakdown caused by com-

pletely running out of fuel, the system

must be reprimed before the engine is

restarted:

Fill the tank with at least 8 litres of

diesel fuel.

Press priming bulb 2 several times.

The engine can now be restarted.

If the engine does not start after several

attempts, contact an approved Dealer.

FUEL TANK (3/3)

Vehicles without priming bulb 2

Put the ignition key in “Ignition On” (M)

position and wait a few minutes before

starting. This will enable the fuel circuit

to be primed. If the engine does not

start, repeat the procedure.

2.1

ENG_UD26111_2

Sommaire 2 (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Section 2: Driving

(Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment)

Running in ..................................................................... 2.2

Starting the engine .............................................................. 2.3

Stopping the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5

Stop and Start Function ........................................................... 2.6

Special features of petrol versions .................................................. 2.9

Special features of diesel versions .................................................. 2.10

Gear lever ..................................................................... 2.11

Handbrake ..................................................................... 2.11

Electronic parking brake .......................................................... 2.12

Recommendations: anti-pollution and fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15

Environment ................................................................... 2.18

Tyre pressure monitoring system ................................................... 2.19

Driver correction devices and aids .................................................. 2.22

Lane departure warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26

Speed limiter ................................................................... 2.28

Cruise control .................................................................. 2.31

Parking distance control .......................................................... 2.35

Reversing camera ............................................................... 2.38

Automatic gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39

running in ..............................................(up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

2.2

ENG_UD10078_2

Rodage (X91 - B91 - K91 - X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Running in

RUNNING IN

Petrol version

Up to 600 miles (1,000 km), do not

exceed 78 mph (130 km/h) in top gear

or 3,000 to 3,500 rpm.

You may only expect top performance

from your vehicle after approximately

1,800 miles (3 000 km).

Service intervals: refer to the

Maintenance Service Booklet for the

vehicle.

Diesel version

For the first 900 miles (1,500 km), do

not exceed 2,500 rpm. After complet-

ing this mileage you may drive faster,

however, it is only after approximately

3600 miles (6,000 km) that you may

reasonably expect full performance.

During the running in period, do not ac-

celerate hard while the engine is still

cold and do not let the engine over-rev.

Service intervals: refer to the

Maintenance Service Booklet for the

vehicle.

starting the engine ................................ (up to the end of the DU)

engine start/stop button ........................ (up to the end of the DU)

starting the engine ................................ (up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

2.3

ENG_UD18932_3

Démarrage / Arrêt moteur avec carte RENAULT mains libres (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Starting the engine

STARTING THE ENGINE (1/2)

Remote control RENAULT

card

When you get into the vehicle, insert the

RENAULT card fully into card reader 2.

To start, press button 1. If a gear is en-

gaged, depress the clutch pedal to start

the vehicle.

Hands-free RENAULT card

The RENAULT card must be inserted

in card reader 2 or in detection zone 3.

To start, depress the brake or clutch

pedal and press button 1. If a gear

is engaged, the vehicle may only be

started by depressing the clutch pedal.

Starting

vehicles with an automatic gearbox

The lever should be in position P.

For all vehicles:

– if one of the starting conditions is

not met the message “Press brake +

START”, “Press clutch + START” or

“Gear lever to P” is displayed on the

instrument panel.

– In some cases it will be necessary to

move the steering wheel while press-

ing start button 1 to assist in unlock-

ing the steering column; a message

on the instrument panel “Turn steer-

ing wheel + START” warns of this.

Starting with the tailgate

open (in hands-free mode)

In this case, the RENAULT card must

not be located in the luggage compart-

ment.

switching on the vehicle ignition ............................ (current page)

2.4

ENG_UD18932_3

Démarrage / Arrêt moteur avec carte RENAULT mains libres (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

STARTING THE ENGINE (2/2)

Accessories function

(switching on the ignition)

Once you have gained access to your

vehicle, you may use some of its func-

tions (radio, navigation, wipers, etc.).

To use the other functions, press

button 1, without depressing any

pedals.

Note: depending on the vehicle, press-

ing button 1 starts the engine.

Operating faults

In certain cases, the hands-free

RENAULT card may not work:

– when the RENAULT card battery is

drained, flat battery, etc.

– near to appliances operating on the

same frequency as the card (moni-

tor, mobile phone, video game, etc.);

– vehicle located in a high electromag-

netic radiation zone.

The message “Please insert keycard”

appears on the instrument panel.

Insert the RENAULT card fully into card

reader 2.

Never leave your vehicle

with the RENAULT card in

the reader or in the pas-

senger compartment while

there is a child (or an animal) in the

vehicle, even for a short while.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine.

Risk of serious injury.

stopping the engine .............................. (up to the end of the DU)

engine start/stop button ........................ (up to the end of the DU)

2.5

ENG_UD18930_1

Arret du moteur (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Stopping the engine

STOPPING THE ENGINE

Never leave your vehicle

with the RENAULT card

inside and never leave a

child (or a pet) unsuper-

vised, even for a short while.

There is a risk that they could start

the engine or operate electrical

equipment (electric windows etc.)

and trap part of their body (neck,

arms, hands, etc.).

Risk of serious injury.

Never switch off the ignition before

the vehicle has stopped completely.

Once the engine has stopped, the

brake servo, power-assisted steer-

ing, etc. and the passive safety de-

vices such as air bags and preten-

sioners will no longer operate.

When you leave your vehi-

cle, especially if you have

your RENAULT card with

you, check that the engine

is completely switched off.

Special note

If the card is no longer in the reader

when you try to switch the engine off,

the message “No keycard Press and

hold” appears on the instrument panel:

press button 1 for longer than two sec-

onds.

Hands-free RENAULT card

With the card in the vehicle, press

button 1: the engine will stop. The steer-

ing column is locked when the driver’s

door is opened or the vehicle is locked.

If the card is no longer in the passenger

compartment when you try to switch the

engine off, the message “No keycard

Press and hold” appears on the instru-

ment panel: press button 1 for longer

than two seconds.

With the engine switched off, any ac-

cessories being used (radio, etc.) will

continue to function for approximately

10 minutes.

When the driver’s door is opened, the

accessories stop working.

Conditions for stopping the

engine

The vehicle must stationary, with the

lever positioned in N or P for vehicles

with an automatic transmission.

Remote control RENAULT

card

With the card in reader 2, press

button 1: the engine will stop. Removing

the card from the reader locks the steer-

ing column.

2.6

ENG_UD25656_1

Fonction Stop and Start (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

The message “Auto Stop” on the instru-

ment panel indicates that the engine is

on standby.

The vehicle equipment remain opera-

tional while the engine is stopped.

The engine will restart when you press

the clutch pedal and move into gear.

Stop and Start Function

STOP AND START FUNCTION (1/3)

This system enables a reduced fuel

consumption and lower greenhouse

gas emissions.

The system is activated automatically

when the vehicle is started.

While driving, the system stops the

engine (standby) when the vehicle is

at a standstill (traffic jam, traffic lights,

etc.)

System operating conditions

Engine standby is activated if:

– the vehicle has been driven since its

last stop;

– the gearbox is in neutral;

– the clutch pedal is released;

and

– the vehicle is travelling at less than 3

km/h.

Special feature of the automatic

engine re-start

Under certain conditions, the engine

can restart on its own in order to guar-

antee your safety and comfort.

This can occur especially when:

– the outdoor temperature is too low or

too high (less than around 0 °C or

higher than around 30 °C);

– the “Clear View” function is activated

(please see “Automatic Climate

Control” in Section 3);

– the battery is not sufficiently charged;

– the vehicle speed is above 7 km/h

(downhill slope, etc.);

– repeated pressing on the brake

pedal or braking system require-

ment;

– ...

Engine on standby - braking

assistance is no longer op-

erational.

Before getting out of the

vehicle, you must switch

off the ignition by pressing

the engine stop (please see

“Starting, stopping the engine”).

Do not drive off when the

engine is on standby (the

message “Auto Stop” is dis-

played on the instrument

panel).

Special feature of vehi-

cles equipped with an

electronic parking brake

If the engine is put on

standby (the message “Auto Stop”

is displayed on the instrument

panel), the electronic parking brake

is not applied automatically.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.7

ENG_UD25656_1

Fonction Stop and Start (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

STOP AND START FUNCTION (2/3)

Deactivate the Stop and

Start function for any opera-

tion performed in the engine

compartment.

Conditions preventing the

standby of the engine

Certain conditions prevent the system

from using the engine standby function,

including when:

– reverse gear is engaged;

– the bonnet is not locked;

– the driver’s door is not closed;

– the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened;

– the outdoor temperature is too low or

too high (less than around 0 °C or

higher than around 30 °C);

– the battery is not sufficiently charged;

– the difference between the vehicle

interior temperature and the auto-

matic climate control instruction is

too high;

– the “Clear View” function is activated

(please see “Automatic Climate

Control” in Section 3);

– the engine coolant temperature is

too low;

– automatic particle filter cleaning is

underway;

– ...

The message “Auto Stop Unavailable”

on the instrument panel indicates that

the engine is on standby.

To fill up with fuel, the engine must

be stopped (and not on standby):

always stop the engine by pressing

the engine stop button (please see

“Starting, stopping the engine)”.

Special cases

– While the system is operating, and

the engine is stopped (traffic jam,

traffic lights, etc.), if the driver gets

out of their seat or unfastens their

seatbelt and opens the driver’s door,

the ignition will be switched off and,

depending on the vehicle, the elec-

tronic parking brake will be automati-

cally deployed. To restart and reac-

tivate the Stop and Start system,

press the start button (please see

“Starting, stopping the engine”).

– In the event of the engine stalling,

if the system is operational, press

down the clutch pedal as far as it will

go to restart.

2.8

ENG_UD25656_1

Fonction Stop and Start (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Operating faults

When the message “Check Stop &

Start” appears on the instrument panel

and the integrated warning light 2 lights

up on the switch 1, the system is deac-

tivated.

Please consult an authorised dealer.

Deactivating, activating the

function

Press 1 to deactivate the function. The

message “Stop & Start deactivated” will

appear on the instrument panel and the

integrated warning light 2 on the switch

will light up.

Pressing again will reactivate the

system. The message “Stop & Start ac-

tivated” will appear on the instrument

panel and the integrated warning light 2

on switch 1 will go out.

STOP AND START FUNCTION (3/3)

The system is automatically reactivated

each time the vehicle is started using

the start button (please see “Starting,

stopping the engine)”.

Before getting out of the

vehicle, you must switch

off the ignition by pressing

the engine stop (please see

“Starting, stopping the engine”).

special features of petrol vehicles ........ (up to the end of the DU)

catalytic converter.................................(up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

catalytic converter.................................(up to the end of the DU)

2.9

ENG_UD10553_1

Particularités des versions essence (X85 - B85 - C85 - S85 - K85 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Special features of petrol versions

SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS

The following operating conditions:

– driving for long periods when the low

fuel level warning light is lit;

– using leaded petrol;

– using fuel or lubrication additives

which are not approved.

Or operating faults such as:

– faulty ignition system, running out of

fuel or disconnected spark plugs re-

sulting in the engine misfiring or cut-

ting out when driving;

– loss of power,

as they may cause the catalytic con-

verter to overheat and thus reduce its

efficiency, or damage it irreparably

and cause heat damage to the vehi-

cle.

If you notice any of the above operating

faults, have the necessary repairs car-

ried out as soon as possible by an ap-

proved Dealer.

These faults may be avoided by regu-

larly taking your vehicle to an approved

Dealer at the intervals specified in the

Maintenance Service Booklet.

Starting problems

To avoid damaging the catalytic con-

verter, do not keep trying to start the

engine (using the start button, or by

pushing or towing the vehicle) without

having identified and corrected the

starting fault.

If the fault cannot be identified, do not

keep trying to start the engine, but con-

tact an approved Dealer.

Do not park the vehicle or

run the engine in locations

where combustible sub-

stances or materials such

as grass or leaves can come into

contact with the hot exhaust system.

catalytic converter.................................(up to the end of the DU)

special features of diesel versions........(up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

2.10

ENG_UD9672_2

Particularités des versions diesel (X95 - B95 - D95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Special features of diesel versions

SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL VERSIONS

Diesel engine speed

Diesel engines are fitted with injection

equipment which prevents the engine

speed being exceeded irrespective of

the gear selected.

If the message “Check anti-pollution

system” is displayed on the instrument

panel accompanied by the Ä and

proved dealer straight away.

When driving, depending on the fuel

grade used, it is possible that white

smoke may be emitted.

This is due to the exhaust particle filter

being cleaned automatically, and does

not affect the way the vehicle runs.

Running out of fuel

If the tank has been completely

drained, the system must be reprimed

after the tank is refilled: see information

on the “fuel tank” in section 1 before re-

starting the engine. Do not park the vehicle or

run the engine in locations

where combustible sub-

stances or materials such

as grass or leaves can come into

contact with the hot exhaust system.

Precautions to be taken in

winter

To avoid any faults in icy weather:

– ensure that the battery is always fully

charged,

– always keep the diesel tank rela-

tively full to avoid water vapour con-

densing in it and accumulating at the

bottom of the tank.

gear lever...............................................................(current page)

changing gear .......................................(up to the end of the DU)

reverse gear

selecting .......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

handbrake.............................................(up to the end of the DU)

2.11

ENG_UD18933_3

Levier de vitesses (X76 - X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Gear lever

Handbrake

GEAR LEVER/HANDBRAKE

Selecting reverse gear

Vehicles with manual gearbox: follow

the grid drawn on knob 1, and depend-

ing on the vehicle, lift ring against the

gear lever knob to select reverse.

Vehicle with automatic gearbox: refer

to the information on the “Automatic

gearbox” in Section 2.

The reversing lights will come on as

soon as reverse gear is selected with

the ignition on.

Handbrake

To release:

Pull lever 2 up slightly, press button 3

and then lower the lever to the floor.

To apply:

Pull the lever 2 upwards and make sure

the vehicle is immobilised.

When stationary and de-

pending on the slope and/or

vehicle load, it may be nec-

essary to pull up the hand-

brake at least two extra notches and

engage a gear (1st or reverse gear)

for vehicles with a manual gearbox

or position P for vehicles with an au-

tomatic transmission.

An impact to the under-

side of the vehicle while

manoeuvring (e.g.: strik-

ing a post, raised kerb or

other street furniture) may result in

damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor-

mation of the rear axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have

your vehicle checked by an ap-

proved Dealer.

Make sure that the hand-

brake is properly released

when driving (red indicator

light off), otherwise over-

heating, or even damage, may

occur.

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

electronic parking brake .......................(up to the end of the DU)

2.12

ENG_UD11746_2

Frein de parking assisté (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Electronic parking brake

Before leaving the vehicle,

check that the electronic

parking brake is fully ap-

plied. Indicator light 2 on

switch 3 and indicator light }

on the instrument panel light up to

show that the parking brake is ap-

plied but go out when the doors are

locked.

Note:

To indicate that the electronic parking

brake is applied or released, a beep

sounds and the message “Apply park-

ing brake” appears on the instrument

panel:

– with the engine running: when the

driver’s door is opened;

– with the engine switched off (eg.

when the engine stalls): when a front

door is opened.

In this case, pull and release switch 3 to

apply the electronic parking brake.

Automatic releasing of the

electronic parking brake

The brake will be released as soon as

the vehicle moves, by accelerating with

a gear selected and the engine running.

Automatic operation

The electronic parking brake en-

sures vehicle immobilisation when the

engine is stopped and engine Start/

Stop button 1 is pressed.

In all other instances, e.g. engine stall-

ing, the electronic parking brake is not

applied automatically. Manual mode

must be used.

For certain country-specific model ver-

sions, the automatic brake application

function is not activated. Refer to the in-

formation on “Manual operation”.

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (1/3)

To confirm that the electronic parking

brake is applied, the message “Parking

brake on” and indicator light }

on the instrument panel and indicator

light 2 on switch 3 light up.

After the engine is switched off, indi-

cator light 2 goes out several minutes

after the electronic parking brake has

been applied and indicator light }

goes out when the vehicle is locked.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.13

ENG_UD11746_2

Frein de parking assisté (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Special cases

When parking on a slope or towing a

trailer, pull switch 3 for a few seconds

to obtain the maximum braking effect.

To park the vehicle without applying the

electronic parking brake (if there is a

risk of freezing, for example):

– with the engine running and

RENAULT card in reader 4, switch

off the engine by pressing engine

Start/Stop button 1;

– select a gear (manual gearbox) or

position P (automatic gearbox);

– depress the brake pedal and press

switch 3 at the same time;

– remove the RENAULT card from the

card reader.

Brief stop

To manually activate the electronic

parking brake, (when stopping at a red

light, or stopping when the engine is

running, etc.): pull and release switch 3.

The brake is released as soon as the

vehicle is started up again.

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (2/3)

Manual operation

You can control the electronic parking

brake manually.

Applying the electronic parking

brake

Pull switch 3. Indicator lights 2 and

} light up on the instrument panel.

Releasing the electronic parking

brake

With the ignition on, depress the brake

pedal then press button 3: indicator

lights 2 and } go out.

2.14

ENG_UD11746_2

Frein de parking assisté (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

– If there is an electronic parking brake

fault, warning lights ® light up

accompanied by the “Parking brake

fault” message, a beep and in certain

cases indicator light }.

This means that you must stop as

soon as traffic conditions allow.

Operating faults

– If there is a fault, the © warning

light illuminates on the instrument

panel accompanied by the “Check

parking brake” message and, in

some cases, the } warning

light.

Contact an approved Dealer as soon

as possible.

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (3/3)

It is therefore essential to

immobilise the vehicle by

engaging first gear (manual

gearbox) or position P (au-

tomatic gearbox). If the slope re-

quires it, chock the vehicle.

Versions with an automatic

gearbox

For safety reasons, automatic release

is deactivated when the driver’s door

is open or not shut properly and the

engine is running (in order to prevent

the vehicle from moving without the

driver). The “Release parking brake

manually” message appears on the

instrument panel when the driver de-

presses the accelerator.

Never leave your vehicle

without moving the selec-

tor lever to position P or N.

This is because when the

vehicle is stationary with the engine

running and a gear engaged, the

vehicle may begin to move if you

accelerate.

There is a risk of accidents.

If no lights or sounds are ap-

parent, this indicates a fault

in the instrument panel. This

indicates that it is essential

to stop immediately (as soon as traf-

fic conditions allow). Ensure that the

vehicle is correctly immobilised and

contact an approved Dealer.

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

fuel economy ........................................ (up to the end of the DU)

advice on antipollution .......................... (up to the end of the DU)

antipollution

advice ..............................................................(current page)

fuel

advice on fuel economy ................................... (current page)

2.15

ENG_UD20973_7

Conseils antipollution, économie de carburant, conduite (X45 - H45 - X85 - B85 - C85 - S85 - X91 - X83 - X61 - F61 - K61 - K85 - X95 - B95 - D95 - J95 - R95 - L38 - X61 ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Advice: antipollution and fuel economy

ADVICE: antipollution, fuel economy and driving (1/3)

Your vehicle complies with criteria for

recycling and recovering vehicles at the

end of their service life which will come

into force in 2015.

Some parts of your vehicle have there-

fore been designed to facilitate future

recycling.

These parts are easy to remove so

that they can be recovered and reproc-

essed by recycling companies.

By virtue of its design, moderate fuel

consumption and initial settings, your

vehicle also conforms to current anti-

pollution regulations. The manufac-

turer is actively striving to reduce pol-

lutant exhaust gas emissions and to

save energy. But the fuel consumption

of your vehicle and the level of pollutant

exhaust gas emissions are also your

responsibility. Ensure that it is main-

tained and used correctly.

Aiding fuel economy

Depending on the vehicle, in order to

optimise consumption, an indicator light

on the instrument panel will inform you

of the best moment to upshift or down-

shift gears:

\ shift up a gear;

[ shift down a gear.

Maintenance

It is important to remember that failure to

respect antipollution regulations could

lead to legal action being taken against

the vehicle owner. In addition, replacing

engine, fuel supply system and exhaust

components with parts other than those

originally recommended by the manu-

facturer may alter your vehicle so that

it no longer complies with antipollution

regulations.

Have your vehicle adjusted and

checked by an approved Dealer, in ac-

cordance with the instructions given in

your maintenance schedule: they will

have all the equipment necessary for

ensuring that your vehicle is maintained

to its original standard.

Engine adjustments

– ignition: this does not require ad-

justment.

– spark plugs: for optimum fuel econ-

omy, efficiency and performance

the specifications laid down by our

Design Department must be strictly

applied.

If the spark plugs have to be

changed, use the make, type and

gap specified for your vehicle’s

engine. Contact an approved dealer

for this.

– idle: this does not require adjust-

ment.

– air filter, diesel filter: a clogged ele-

ment reduces performance. It must

be replaced.

2.16

ENG_UD20973_7

Conseils antipollution, économie de carburant, conduite (X45 - H45 - X85 - B85 - C85 - S85 - X91 - X83 - X61 - F61 - K61 - K85 - X95 - B95 - D95 - J95 - R95 - L38 - X61 ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

ADVICE: antipollution, fuel economy and driving (2/3)

– Sporty driving uses a lot of fuel: drive

with a light right foot.

– Brake as little as possible. If you an-

ticipate an obstacle or bend in ad-

vance, you may then simply release

the accelerator pedal.

– Do not try to maintain the same

speed up a hill, accelerate no more

than you would on the level. Keep

your foot in the same position on the

accelerator pedal.

– Double declutching and accelerating

before switching off are unnecessary

in modern vehicles.

– Bad weather, flooded roads:

Do not drive through floods

if the water is above the

lower edge of the wheel

rims.

Driving

– Drive carefully for the first few miles

until the engine reaches its normal

operating temperature, rather than

let it warm up while the vehicle is sta-

tionary.

– Speed is expensive.

– Do not overrev the engine in the in-

termediate gears.

Always use the highest gear possi-

ble without labouring the engine.

On versions with an automatic gear-

box, it is preferable to keep the gear

lever in position D.

– Avoid sudden acceleration.

Exhaust gas monitoring

system

The exhaust gas monitoring system will

detect any operating faults in the vehi-

cle’s antipollution system.

If this system malfunctions, toxic sub-

stances may be released into the at-

mosphere or damage may occur.

ÄThis warning light on the in-

strument panel will indicate if

there are any faults in the system:

This lights up when the ignition is

switched on and goes out when the

engine is started.

– If it lights up continuously, consult an

approved Dealer as soon as possi-

ble;

– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed

until the light stops flashing. Contact

your approved dealer as soon as

possible.

Obstructions to the driver

On the driver’s side, only

use mats adapted to the ve-

hicle that attach to the pre-

installed parts, and regularly check

their mounting. Do not place several

mats on top of each other.

Risk of pedals jamming

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.17

ENG_UD20973_7

Conseils antipollution, économie de carburant, conduite (X45 - H45 - X85 - B85 - C85 - S85 - X91 - X83 - X61 - F61 - K61 - K85 - X95 - B95 - D95 - J95 - R95 - L38 - X61 ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

ADVICE: antipollution, fuel economy and driving (3/3)

Advice on use

– Electricity is fuel; switch off all the

electrical components which are

not really needed. However (safety

first), keep your lights on when the

visibility is bad (“see and be seen”).

– Use the air vents. Driving with the

windows open at 60 mph (100 km/h)

will increase fuel consumption by

4%.

– Avoid using the car for door-to-door

calls (short journeys with long waits

in between) because the engine

never reaches its normal operating

temperature.

Tyres

– An underinflated tyre increases fuel

consumption.

– The use of non-recommended tyres

can increase fuel consumption.

– In vehicles fitted with air condi-

tioning, it is normal to observe an

increase in fuel consumption (es-

pecially in urban conditions) when

it is used. For vehicles fitted with

manual air conditioning, switch off

the system when it is not required.

Advice for reducing consumption

and therefore helping to preserve

the environment:

If the vehicle has been parked in the

sun, open the doors for a few mo-

ments to let the hot air escape before

starting the engine.

– Never fill the fuel tank right to the

brim to avoid overflow.

– Do not leave an empty roof rack

fitted to the vehicle.

– It is better to fit a trailer for bulky ob-

jects.

– When towing a caravan, fit a wind

deflector and adjust it carefully.

environment ..........................................(up to the end of the DU)

2.18

ENG_UD25716_1

Environnement (sans marque) (X44 - X45 - X77 - X81 - X85 - X90 - X91 - X83 - X61 - TEST - X95 - J95 - R95 - F90 Ph2 - X33 - X47 - X43 - X38 - H79 - X62 - X32 - X09 - ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Environment

ENVIRONMENT

Emissions

Your vehicle has been designed to emit

fewer greenhouse gases (CO2) while in

use, and therefore to consume less fuel

(eg. 140 g/km, equivalent to 5.3 l/100

km for a diesel vehicle).

Our vehicles are also equipped with a

particle filter system including a cata-

lytic converter, an oxygen sensor and

an active carbon filter (the latter pre-

vents vapour from the fuel tank being

released into the open air).

For certain diesel vehicles, this system

also has a particle filter to reduce the

volume of soot particles emitted.

Please make your own

contribution towards

protecting the environment

too

– Worn parts replaced in the course of

routine vehicle maintenance (vehi-

cle battery, oil filter, air filter, batter-

ies, etc.) and oil containers (empty or

filled with used oil) must be disposed

of through specialist organisations.

– At the end of the vehicle’s service

life, it should be sent to approved

centres to ensure that it is recycled.

– In all cases, comply with local legis-

lation.

Recycling

Your vehicle is 85% recyclable and

95% recoverable.

To achieve these objectives, many of

the vehicle components have been de-

signed to enable them to be recycled.

The materials and structures have

been carefully designed to allow these

components to be easily removed and

reprocessed by specialist companies.

In order to preserve raw material re-

sources, this vehicle incorporates nu-

merous parts made from recycled plas-

tics or renewable materials (vegetable

or animal-derived materials such as

cotton or wool).

Your vehicle has been designed with

respect for the environment in mind for

its entire service life: during production,

use and at the end of its life.

This commitment is illustrated by the

Renault eco² signature.

Manufacture

Your vehicle has been manufactured at

an factory which uses a progress policy

to reduce the environmental impact on

the surrounding area and nature (re-

duction of water and energy consump-

tion, visual and noise pollution, atmos-

pheric emissions and waste water,

sorting and reusing waste).

tyres ......................................................(up to the end of the DU)

tyre pressure monitor............................(up to the end of the DU)

tyre pressure.........................................(up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

2.19

ENG_UD6303_1

Système de surveillance de pression des pneumatiques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

This system monitors the tyre pressure.

Depending on the vehicle, the infor-

mation is displayed on the instrument

panel. In this case, they appear:

– with the ignition on, when scrolling

through the trip computer and warn-

ing system information by pressing

control 3 (refer to the information

on the “trip computer and warning

system” in Section 1);

– or if there is a fault when driving

(refer to the following pages to find

out more about the warning mes-

sages).

Tyre pressure monitor

This function is an addi-

tional driving aid.

However, the function does

not take the place of the

driver. It cannot, therefore, under

any circumstances replace the vig-

ilance or the responsibility of the

driver.

Check the tyre pressures, including

the emergency spare wheel, once a

month.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR (1/3)

If the vehicle is equipped with the func-

tion, this system monitors the tyre pres-

sure.

Operating principle

Each wheel (except for the emergency

spare wheel) has a sensor in the infla-

tion valve which periodically measures

the tyre pressure.

The system informs the driver via the

display 1 and trip computer and warn-

ing system 2 that the tyres are suf-

ficiently inflated and warns if they are

underinflated or leaking.

The tyre pressure can be adjusted

when cold (refer to the information on

“Tyre pressures”).

If tyre pressures cannot be checked

when the tyres are cold, the recom-

mended pressures must be increased

by 0.2 to 0.3 bar (3 PSI).

Never deflate a hot tyre.

Changing a wheel

If you wish to change your wheels (fit-

ting winter tyres etc.), the system will

reset itself automatically after approx-

imately two minutes driving at a mini-

mum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

1 2

Changing a wheel

The system may take sev-

eral minutes depending on

use for the new wheel po-

sitions and pressures to be recog-

nised; check the tyre pressures after

all operations.

2.20

ENG_UD6303_1

Système de surveillance de pression des pneumatiques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Display

Display 1 on the instrument panel and

trip computer and warning system 2 in-

forms you of any tyre pressure faults

(flat tyre, punctured tyre, system fault,

etc.).

TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR (2/3)

1“Puncture”

Wheel F indicates that the wheel con-

cerned is punctured or severely un-

derinflated. Replace it or contact an

approved dealer if it is punctured. Top

up the tyre pressure if the wheel is de-

flated,

This message appears along with the

® warning light.

“Tyre pressure sensors absent” or

“Check tyre pressure sensors”

One wheel E disappears, indicating

that the sensor on this wheel is missing

or faulty (e.g. if the emergency spare

wheel is fitted).

“Adjust tyre pressure”

A shaded wheel F indicates a deflated

tyre.

“Inflate tyres for motorway”

All four wheels F become full, the tyre

pressure is not adapted to the driving

speed. Slow down or inflate all four

tyres to “motorway pressure” (refer to

the label located on the label on the

edge of the driver’s door).

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.21

ENG_UD6303_1

Système de surveillance de pression des pneumatiques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Tyre repair product and

inflation kit

Because the valves are specially de-

signed, only use equipment approved

by the approved network.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR (3/3)

Emergency spare wheel

If the vehicle is equipped with an emer-

gency spare wheel, it will not have a

sensor. When it is fitted to the vehicle,

the message “Tyre pressure sensors

absent” is displayed on the instrument

panel.

Replacing wheels/tyres

This system requires specific equip-

ment (wheels, tyres, sensors, etc.).

Contact an approved dealer to replace

the tyres and to find out about avail-

able accessories compatible with the

system: the use of any other accessory

could affect the correct operation of the

system or damage a sensor.

ABS ......................................................(up to the end of the DU)

anti-lock braking system: ABS .............. (up to the end of the DU)

ESP: Electronic Stability Program ........ (up to the end of the DU)

ASR (traction control) ........................... (up to the end of the DU)

traction control: ASR .............................(up to the end of the DU)

Electronic Stability Program: ESP ........ (up to the end of the DU)

emergency brake assist........................(up to the end of the DU)

emergency braking ............................... (up to the end of the DU)

traction control: ASR ..............................................(current page)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

2.22

ENG_UD25646_1

Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Driver correction devices and aids

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES/AIDS (1/4)

Depending on the vehicle, this is com-

posed of:

– the ABS (anti-lock braking

system);

– electronic stability control ESC

with understeer control and trac-

tion control ASR ;

– emergency brake assist with, de-

pending on the vehicle, braking

anticipation.

In an emergency, apply firm and

continuous pressure to the brake

pedal. There is no need to pump

it repeatedly. The ABS will modu-

late the force applied in the braking

system.

These functions are an ad-

ditional aid in the event of

critical driving conditions,

enabling the vehicle behav-

iour to be adapted to suit the driving

conditions.

However, the functions do not take

the place of the driver. They do

not increase the vehicle’s limits

and should not encourage you

to drive more quickly. Therefore,

they can under no circumstances

replace the vigilance or responsibil-

ity of the driver when manoeuvring

the vehicle (the driver must always

be ready for sudden incidents which

may occur when driving).

Your braking systems

are partially operational.

However, it is dangerous

to brake suddenly and

it is essential to stop immediately,

as soon as traffic conditions allow.

Contact an approved dealer.

Operating faults:

– © and x lit up on the in-

strument panel alongside mes-

sages “Check ABS”, “Check brak-

ing system” and “Check ESC”: ABS,

ESC and emergency brake assist

are deactivated. Braking is always

enabled;

– x, D, © and ® lit

up on the instrument panel alongside

the message “Braking system fault”:

this indicates a fault in the braking

system.

In both cases, consult an approved

Dealer.

ABS (anti-lock braking

system)

Under heavy braking, the ABS prevents

the wheels from locking, allowing the

stopping distance to be managed and

keeping control of the vehicle.

Under these circumstances, the vehi-

cle can be steered to avoid an obstacle

whilst braking. In addition, this system

can increase stopping distances, par-

ticularly on roads with low surface grip

(wet ground etc.).

You will feel a pulsation through the

brake pedal each time the system is

activated. The ABS does not in any way

improve the vehicle’s physical perform-

ance relating to the road surface and

roadholding. It is still essential to follow

the rules of good driving practice (such

as driving at a safe distance from the

vehicle in front etc.).

Hill Start Assistance (HSA) .................................... (current page)

hill start ................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.23

ENG_UD25646_1

Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES/AIDS (2/4)

Hill start assistance

This device assists the driver when

starting on hills (ascending or descend-

ing). It prevents the vehicle from rolling

forwards or backwards by automatically

applying the brakes when the driver lifts

their foot off the brake pedal to depress

the accelerator pedal.

System operation

It only operates when the gear lever is

in a position other than neutral (other

than N or P for automatic transmis-

sions) and the vehicle is completely

stationary (brake pedal depressed)

The system holds the vehicle for ap-

proximately 2 seconds. The brakes are

then gradually released (the vehicle will

move according to the slope).

The hill start assistance

system cannot completely

prevent the vehicle from

rolling backwards in all sit-

uations (extremely steep gradients,

etc.).

In all cases, the driver may depress

the brake pedal to prevent the ve-

hicle from rolling forwards or back-

wards.

The hill start assistance function

should not be used for prolonged

stops: use the brake pedal.

This function is not designed to im-

mobilise the vehicle permanently.

If necessary, use the brake pedal to

stop the vehicle.

The driver must remain particularly

vigilant when driving on slippery or

low-grip surfaces and/or on hills.

Risk of serious injury.

2.24

ENG_UD25646_1

Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES/AIDS (3/4)

Electronic stability control

ESC with understeer control

and traction control ASR

Electronic stability control ESC

This system helps you to keep control

of the vehicle in critical driving condi-

tions (avoiding an obstacle, loss of grip

on a bend, etc.).

Operating principle

A sensor in the steering wheel detects

the direction selected by the driver.

Other sensors throughout the vehicle

measure the actual direction.

The system compares driver input to

the actual trajectory of the vehicle and

corrects the trajectory if necessary by

controlling the braking of certain wheels

and/or engine power. In the event that

the system is engaged, indicator light

ù flashes on the instrument panel.

Understeer control

This system optimises the action of the

ESC in the case of pronounced under-

steer (loss of front axle road holding).

Traction control ASR

This system helps to limit wheelspin of

the drive wheels and to control the ve-

hicle when pulling away accelerating or

decelerating.

Operating principle

Using the wheel sensors, the system

measures and compares the speed of

the drive wheels at all times and slows

down their over-rotation. If a wheel is

starting to slip, the system brakes au-

tomatically until the drive supplied be-

comes compatible with the level of grip

under the wheel again.

The system also adjusts the engine

speed to the grip available under the

wheels, independently of the pressure

exerted on the accelerator pedal.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operat-

ing fault the message “Check ESC” and

warning light © appear on the in-

strument panel. In this case, the ESC

and ASR are deactivated.

Consult an approved dealer.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.25

ENG_UD25646_1

Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

The traction control ASR offers addi-

tional safety, it is recommended that

you do not drive with the function disa-

bled. Correct this as soon as possible

by pressing switch 1 again.

Note: the function is reactivated auto-

matically when the ignition is switched

on or when a speed of approximately

24 mph (40 km/h) is exceeded.

Emergency brake assist

This system supplements the ABS

and helps reduce vehicle stopping dis-

tances.

Operating principle

The system is for detecting an emer-

gency braking situation. In this case,

the braking assistance immediately de-

velops maximum power and may trig-

ger ABS regulation.

ABS braking is maintained as long as

the brake pedal is applied.

Hazard warning lights switching on

Depending on the vehicle, these may

light up in the event of sudden decel-

eration.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operat-

ing fault the message “Check brak-

ing system” appears on the instrument

panel along with the © warning

light.

Consult an approved dealer.

Braking anticipation

Depending on the vehicle, when you

rapidly release the accelerator, the

system anticipates the braking ma-

noeuvre in order to reduce stopping

distances.

Special cases

When using the cruise control:

– if you use the accelerator, when you

release it, the system may be trig-

gered;

– if you do not use the accelerator, the

system will not be triggered.

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES/AIDS (4/4)

Disabling the function ASR

In some situations (driving on very wet

ground: snow, mud, etc. or driving with

snow chains fitted), the system may

reduce the engine output to limit wheel-

spin. If this is not required, it is possible

to deactivate the function by pressing

switch 1.

The message “Traction control off” is

displayed on the instrument panel to

inform you.

2.26

ENG_UD25647_1

Franchissement involontaire de ligne continue ou discontinue (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Lane departure warning

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (1/2)

This lane departure warning system no-

tifies the driver when they accidentally

cross a continuous or broken line.

This function uses a camera attached

to the windscreen, behind the rear-view

mirror.

This function is a driving aid in the event of the accidental crossing of

a continuous or broken line in the road. However, the function is not in-

tended to replace the driver. The function can be disrupted under certain

conditions, including:

– poor visibility (rain, snow, fog, dirty windscreen, glare of the sun, partially ob-

scured road lines, etc.);

– roads with tight bends;

– closely following a vehicle in the same lane;

– worn road markings, difficult to distinguish or spaced very widely apart;

– narrow roads;

– ...

In this case, warning light  on the instrument panel goes out to indicate that

the function will not operate (lines not detected).

Under no circumstances should this function replace the driver’s care or respon-

sibility whilst performing manoeuvres.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.27

ENG_UD25647_1

Franchissement involontaire de ligne continue ou discontinue (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (2/2)

Adjustment

From the vehicle settings customisation

menu (please refer to the information

on the “Vehicle settings customisation

menu” in Section 1), you can:

– adjust the alert audio volume. To

do this, select “lane departure alert:

volume” (five levels);

– adjust the alert sensitivity. To do this,

select “lane departure alert: sensitiv-

ity” (three levels).

Deactivation

Press button 1 on the central rear-view

mirror.

The warning light on button 1 goes out,

accompanied by a message on the in-

strument panel “Lane departure warn-

ing de-activated”.

Operating faults

In the event of a malfunction, a mes-

sage “Lane departure warning check” is

displayed on the instrument panel, and

the warning light on button 1 stays off.

Consult an approved dealer.

When a line is crossed and the indica-

tors have not been activated, the func-

tion alerts the driver through warning

light  on the instrument panel,

and a beep.

Conditions for non-activation

of alerts

– Indicators activated or having been

activated less than approximately

four seconds prior to departing from

the lane;

– Very fast lane departure;

– Driving continuously on a line;

– On bends, the function allows for

slightly cutting the bend;

– ...

Activation

Press button 1: the warning light on

the 1 button lights up, accompanied by

the message “Lane deviation warning

on” and a beep.

The function sounds the alarm if:

– the warning light on the 1 button

lights up;

and

– the vehicle speed is greater than ap-

proximately 45 mph (70 km/h);

and

– lines are detected.

Warning light  comes on on the

instrument panel to notify the driver.

speed limiter ......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

cruise control-speed limiter...................(up to the end of the DU)

cruise control ........................................ (up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

2.28

ENG_UD18934_2

Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction limiteur (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Speed limiter

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (1/3)

The speed limiter function helps you

stay within the driving speed limit that

you choose, known as the limit speed.

Controls

1 Main “On/Off” switch.

2 Limit speed activation, storage and

increase switch (+).

3 Decrease limit speed (-).

4 Switch the function to standby (with

memorisation of the limit speed) (O).

5 Activation and recall of stored limit

speed (R).

Switching on

Press switch 1 on the side showing .

Indicator light 7 comes on, lit orange,

and the message “Speed limiter” ap-

pears on the instrument panel, accom-

panied by dashes in zone 6 to indicate

that the speed limiter function is acti-

vated and waiting to store a limit speed.

To store the current speed, press

switch 2 (+): The limited speed will

appear in zone 6. The minimum stored

speed is 20 mph (30 km/h).

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.29

ENG_UD18934_2

Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction limiteur (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Driving

When a limited speed has been stored

and this speed is not reached, driving is

similar to driving a vehicle without the

speed limiter function.

Once you have reached the stored

speed, no effort on the accelera-

tor pedal will allow you to exceed

the programmed speed except in an

emergency (refer to information on

“Exceeding the limit speed”).

Varying the limit speed

The limit speed may be changed by re-

peatedly pressing:

– switch 2 (+) to increase the speed;

– switch 3 (-) to decrease the speed.

Exceeding the limit speed

It is possible to exceed the limit speed

at any moment. To do this: press the

accelerator pedal firmly and fully

(beyond the kickdown point).

While the speed is being exceeded, the

limit speed flashes on the instrument

panel and area C lights up red.

Then, as far as is possible, release

the accelerator pedal: the speed lim-

iter function will return as soon as you

reach a speed lower than the stored

speed.

Limited speed cannot be maintained

If driving up or down a steep gradient,

the system is unable to maintain the

limit speed: the stored speed on the

instrument panel will flash and zone C

will light up in red to inform you of this

situation.

The speed limiter function is

in no way linked to the brak-

ing system.

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (2/3)

2.30

ENG_UD18934_2

Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction limiteur (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Recalling the limit speed

If a speed has been stored, it can be re-

called by pressing switch 5 (R).

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (3/3)

Putting the function on

standby

The speed limiter function is sus-

pended when you press switch 4 (O).

In this case, the limit speed will remain

stored and is no longer displayed in

zone 6 and the message “Memorised”

along with the stored speed will appear

on the display.

When the speed limiter is put on

standby, pressing switch 2 (+) re-

activates the function without taking

into account the stored speed: it is

the speed at which the vehicle is

moving that is taken into account.

Switching off the function

The speed limiter function is deacti-

vated if you press switch 1: in this case

a speed is no longer stored. The in-

strument panel orange indicator light 7

goes out to confirm that the function is

deactivated.

cruise control ........................................ (up to the end of the DU)

cruise control-speed limiter...................(up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

2.31

ENG_UD18935_2

Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction régulateur (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Cruise control

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (1/4)

The cruise control function helps you to

maintain your driving speed at a speed

that you choose, called the cruising

speed.

This cruising speed may be set at any

speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

The cruise control function

is in no way linked to the

braking system.

This function is an addi-

tional driving aid. However,

the function does not take

the place of the driver.

Therefore, it can under no circum-

stances replace the driver’s respon-

sibility to respect speed limits and to

be vigilant (the driver must always

be ready to brake). Cruise control

must not be used in heavy traffic, on

undulating or slippery roads (black

ice, aquaplaning, gravel) and during

bad weather (fog, rain, side winds

etc.).

There is a risk of accidents.

Controls

1 Main “On/Off” switch.

2 Limit speed activation, storage and

increase switch (+).

3 Decrease cruising speed (-).

4 Switch the function to standby

(with memorisation of the gov-

erned cruising speed) (O).

5 Activation with recall of stored gov-

erned cruising speed (R).

235

2.32

ENG_UD18935_2

Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction régulateur (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (2/4)

Switching on

Press switch 1 on the side showing .

Indicator light 7 comes on, lit green, and

the message “Cruise control” appears

on the instrument panel and dashes

appear in zone 6 to indicate that the

cruise control function is activated and

waiting to store a cruising speed.

Activating cruise control

At a steady speed (above 20 mph

(30 km/h) approximately) press

switch 2 (+): the speed is stored. The

cruising speed will appear in zone 6.

Cruise control activation is confirmed

when area A lights up green in addition

to indicator light 7. Area B also lights

up green to indicate that the cruising

speed has been reached.

Driving

Once a cruising speed is stored and

the cruise control function is active,

you may lift your foot off the accelera-

tor pedal.

Important: you are never-

theless advised to keep

your feet close to the pedals

in order to react if neces-

sary.

B C 6

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.33

ENG_UD18935_2

Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction régulateur (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Putting the function on

standby

The function is suspended when you:

– press switch 4 (O);

– depress the brake pedal;

– depress the clutch pedal or shift into

neutral if the vehicle has an auto-

matic gearbox.

In all three cases, the cruising speed re-

mains stored, it is no longer displayed in

zone 6 and the message “Memorised”

along with the stored speed will appear

on the instrument panel.

Standby is confirmed when zones A, B

and C go out.

Exceeding the cruising speed

The cruising speed may be exceeded

at any time by depressing the acceler-

ator pedal. The cruising speed flashes

on the instrument panel along with the

illumination of zone C in red.

Then, release the accelerator: after a

few seconds, the vehicle will automati-

cally return to its set cruising speed.

Cruising speed cannot be

maintained

If driving up or down a steep gradient,

the system is unable to maintain the

cruising speed: the stored speed on the

instrument panel will flash and zone C

will light up in red to inform you of this

situation.

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (3/4)

Adjusting the cruising speed

The cruising speed may be changed by

pressing the following repeatedly:

– switch 2 (+) to increase the speed;

– switch 3 (-) to decrease the speed.

The cruise control function

is in no way linked to the

braking system.

B C

2.34

ENG_UD18935_2

Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction régulateur (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (4/4)

Note: if the speed previously stored is

much higher than the current speed,

the vehicle will accelerate more rapidly

to reach this threshold.

When the cruise control function is

put on standby, pressing switch 2 (+)

reactivates the cruise control func-

tion without taking into account the

stored speed: it is the speed at

which the vehicle is moving that is

taken into account.

Switching off the function

The cruise control function is deacti-

vated if you press switch 1: in this case

a speed is no longer stored. The instru-

ment panel green indicator light 7 and

zones A, B and C go out, confirming

that the function is deactivated.

Putting the cruise control

on standby or switching it

off does not cause a rapid

reduction in speed: you

must brake by depressing the brake

pedal.

Returning to the cruising speed

If a speed is stored, it can be recalled,

once you are sure that the road condi-

tions are suitable (traffic, road surface,

weather conditions, etc.).

Press switch 5 (R) if the vehicle speed

is above 20 mph (30 km/h).

When recalling the stored speed

zone A lights up to confirm activation.

Zone B lights up as soon as the cruis-

ing speed is reached.

B C

parking distance control........................(up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

reversing sensor ................................... (up to the end of the DU)

2.35

ENG_UD25722_1

Aide au parking (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Parking distance control

This function is an additional aid that indicates the distance between the

vehicle and an obstacle whilst reversing, using sound signals.

Under no circumstances should it replace the driver’s care or responsibil-

ity whilst reversing.

The driver should always look out for sudden hazards during driving: always

ensure that there are no moving obstacles (such as a child, animal, pram or bi-

cycle, etc.) or small, narrow objects such as stones or posts in your path when

manoeuvring.

Operating principle

Ultrasonic detectors, installed in the

front or rear bumper depending on the

vehicle, measure the distance between

the vehicle and an obstacle whilst re-

versing.

This measurement is indicated by

beeps which become more frequent the

closer you come to the obstacle, until

they become a continuous beep when

the vehicle is approximately 25 centi-

metres from the obstacle.

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (1/3)

Front parking distance

control

(depending on vehicle)

Operation

The parking distance control system

is only activated when the vehicle is

driven at a speed below approximately

6 mph (10 km/h).

Most objects located less than approx-

imately 60 centimetres away from the

front of the vehicle are detected and a

beep is emitted.

Automatic activation/deactivation of

the front parking distance control

The system deactivates:

– when the electronic parking brake is

applied;

– when the vehicle speed is above ap-

proximately 6 mph (10 km/h);

– when the vehicle is stationary for

more than approximately five sec-

onds and an obstacle is detected

(such as when in a traffic jam etc.);

– when the vehicle is in neutral or

when the gear lever has been shifted

to N or P for automatic gearboxes;

2.36

ENG_UD25722_1

Aide au parking (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (2/3)

Rear parking distance control

Operation

When reversing, most objects located

less than approximately 1.5 metres

away from the rear of the vehicle are

detected and a beep is emitted.

If there are obstacles located close to

both the front and rear of the vehicle,

only the closest of the two will be ac-

knowledged and the corresponding

front or rear beep sound will be emit-

ted. If obstacles are detected both to

the front and to the rear of the vehicle at

the same time, and they are both less

than 30 centimetres away from the ve-

hicle, the corresponding front and rear

beeps will be emitted alternately.

Automatic activation/deactivation of

the rear parking distance control

The system deactivates:

– when the electronic parking brake is

applied;

– when the vehicle speed is above ap-

proximately 6 mph (10 km/h);

– when the vehicle is stationary for

more than approximately five sec-

onds and an obstacle is detected

(such as when in a traffic jam etc.);

– when the vehicle is in neutral or

when the gear lever has been shifted

to N or P for automatic gearboxes.

An impact to the under-

side of the vehicle while

manoeuvring (e.g.: strik-

ing a post, raised kerb or

other street furniture) may result in

damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor-

mation of an axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have

your vehicle checked by an ap-

proved Dealer.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.37

ENG_UD25722_1

Aide au parking (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (3/3)

Special features

Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors are

not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

Operating faults

When the system detects an operating

fault there will be a 5-second continu-

ous beep as a warning. Consult an ap-

proved dealer.

When the vehicle is being driven at

a speed below approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h), certain noises (motorcy-

cle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may

trigger the beeping sound.

Prolonged deactivation of the

system

You may permanently activate or deac-

tivate the front or rear parking distance

control separately.

From the vehicle settings customisa-

tion menu (refer to the information on

the “Vehicle settings customisation

menu” in Section 1), select the line

“Front parking sensor” or “Rear parking

sensor” then activate or deactivate the

system:

<: function deactivated;

= function activated.

Adjusting the parking

distance control volume

From the vehicle settings customisa-

tion menu (please refer to the informa-

tion on “Vehicle settings customisa-

tion menu” in Section 1), select the line

“Parking sensor volume” to adjust the

parking distance control volume and

confirm by pressing key 1 or 2.

2.38

ENG_UD13559_3

Caméra de recul (X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Reversing camera

REVERSING CAMERA

Fixed clearance gauge 2

The fixed clearance gauge comprises

coloured markers A, B and C indicating

the distance behind the vehicle:

– A (red) approximately 50 centime-

tres from the vehicle;

– B (yellow) approximately 1 metre

from the vehicle;

– C (green) approximately 2 to

3 metres from the vehicle;

Operation

When reversing (and up to approxi-

mately 5 seconds after shifting to an-

other gear), a view of the surroundings

to the rear of the vehicle is displayed on

the instrument panel accompanied by

two clearance gauges 1 and 2 (mobile

and fixed).

Note: make sure that the reversing

camera is not obscured (by dirt, mud,

snow, etc.).

Mobile clearance gauge 1

This is shown in blue on the naviga-

tion screen. It indicates the vehicle tra-

jectory according to the position of the

steering wheel.

This gauge remains fixed and indicates

the vehicle trajectory if the wheels are

in line with the vehicle.

This system is initially used with the aid

of the gauges (mobile for the trajectory

and fixed for the distance), then when

the red zone is reached, use the rep-

resentation of the bumper to stop ac-

curately.

Note: depending on the vehicle, certain

parameters can be adjusted. Refer to

the handbook for the equipment.

This function is an additional

aid. It cannot, therefore,

under any circumstances

replace the vigilance or the

responsibility of the driver.

The driver should always pay atten-

tion to sudden incidents during driv-

ing: always ensure that there are no

moving obstacles (such as a child,

animal, pram, bicycle, etc.) or small,

narrow objects such as stones or

posts in your path when manoeu-

vring.

The screen shows a reverse image.

The frames are a representation

projected onto flat ground; this in-

formation must not be taken into

account when superimposed on a

vertical object or an object on the

ground.

Objects which appear on the edge

of the screen may be deformed.

In very bright light (snow, vehicle in

sunshine etc.), the camera vision

may be adversely affected.

When the tailgate is open or not

closed properly, the message “Boot

open” is displayed on the instrument

panel (risk of incorrect information

on-screen)

automatic gearbox (use) .......................(up to the end of the DU)

automatic gearbox selector lever..........(up to the end of the DU)

changing gear .......................................(up to the end of the DU)

reverse gear

selecting .......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

driving ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

2.39

ENG_UD21799_7

Boîte automatique (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Selector lever 1

Display 3 on the instrument panel

shows the mode and gear selected.

4: P: park

5: R: reverse gear

6: N: neutral

7: D: automatic mode

8 : manual mode

9: zone displaying gearbox mode or

gear engaged in manual mode

Operation

With the gear lever 1 in position P,

switch on the ignition.

To move out of position P, you must de-

press the brake pedal before pressing

unlocking button 2.

With the foot on the brake pedal (warn-

ing light c on the display 3 goes out),

move the lever out of position P.

Only engage D or R when the vehi-

cle is stopped, with your foot on the

brake and the accelerator pedal re-

leased.

Automatic gearbox

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (1/3)

Driving in automatic mode

Select position D. In most traffic con-

ditions, you will not have to touch the

gear selector lever again: the gears will

change automatically at the right time

and at the most suitable engine speed

because the automatic system takes

into account the vehicle load and road

contour and adjusts itself to the particu-

lar driving style you have chosen.

Economical driving

When driving, always leave the lever

in position D, keeping the accelerator

pedal lightly depressed to ensure auto-

matic gear changes at a lower engine

speed.

Accelerating and overtaking

Depress the accelerator pedal firmly

and fully (so that it goes beyond the

kickdown point).

This will enable you to change down

to the optimum gear within the

engine range.

2.40

ENG_UD21799_7

Boîte automatique (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Parking the vehicle

When the vehicle is stopped, move the

lever to position P while keeping your

foot on the brake pedal: the gearbox is

in neutral and the drive wheels are me-

chanically locked by the driveshaft.

Apply the handbrake or, depending

on the vehicle, ensure that the elec-

tronic parking brake is applied.

Special circumstances

– If the road contours and bends

do not allow you to stay in auto-

matic mode (e.g.: in the mountains),

we recommend that you change to

manual mode.

This will prevent the automatic gear-

box from changing gears repeatedly

when climbing, and permit engine

braking on long descents.

– In cold weather, to prevent the

engine from stalling, wait a few mo-

ments before shifting the selector

lever from position P or N and en-

gaging D or R.

Driving in manual mode

With the selector lever in position D,

move the lever to the left. Shifting the

lever repeatedly allows you to change

gears manually:

– To move down through the gears,

push the lever backwards;

– To move up through the gears, push

the lever forwards.

The gear selected is displayed on the

instrument panel.

Special cases

In certain driving conditions (e.g.:

engine protection, operation of the

Electronic Stability Program) the auto-

mated system may change the gear au-

tomatically.

Likewise, to prevent incorrect manoeu-

vres, a gear change may be refused by

the automatic system: in this case the

gear display flashes for a few seconds

as a warning.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (2/3)

In very cold weather, the system

may prevent the gears from being

shifted in manual mode until the

gearbox reaches the right tempera-

ture.

An impact to the under-

side of the vehicle while

manoeuvring (e.g.: strik-

ing a post, raised kerb or

other street furniture) may result in

damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor-

mation of an axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have

your vehicle checked by an ap-

proved Dealer.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

2.41

ENG_UD21799_7

Boîte automatique (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

When setting off, if the lever is locked

in position P even though you are de-

pressing the brake pedal and pressing

unlocking button 2, the lever can be re-

leased manually. To do this, press the

button by inserting an object into the

hole 10 and simultaneously press un-

locking button 2 located on the lever.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (3/3)

Operating faults

– When driving, if the message

“Check auto gearbox” appears on

the instrument panel, this indicates

there is a fault.

Contact your approved Dealer as

soon as possible.

– When driving, if the message “Auto

gearbox overheating” appears on the

instrument panel, stop the vehicle to

allow the gearbox to cool down.

Contact your approved Dealer as

soon as possible.

– If a vehicle with an automatic

gearbox breaks down, refer to the

information on “Towing” in Section 5.

2.42

ENG_UD9525_5

Filler NU (X06 - C06 - S06 - X35 - L35 - X44 - C44 - G44 - X45 - H45 - X65 - L65 - S65 - X73 - B73 - X74 - B74 - K74 - X77 - J77 - F77 - R77 - X81 - J81 - X84 - B84 - C84 ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_2

3.1

ENG_UD26112_2

Sommaire 3 (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Section 3: Your comfort

Air vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2

Manual air conditioning ........................................................... 3.4

Automatic climate control ......................................................... 3.6

Air conditioning: information and advice on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11

Electric windows, electric sunroof ................................................... 3.12

Manual window winder controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

Interior lighting .................................................................. 3.15

Sun visor ...................................................................... 3.16

Passenger compartment storage, fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17

Accessories socket .............................................................. 3.21

Ashtray – Cigarette lighter ......................................................... 3.21

Rear bench seat ................................................................ 3.22

Boot .......................................................................... 3.25

Rear parcel shelf ................................................................ 3.26

Luggage cover: estate models ..................................................... 3.27

Luggage compartment storage space/fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29

Transporting objects in the boot/towing (towing equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32

Luggage net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33

Roof bars ...................................................................... 3.35

Multimedia equipment ............................................................ 3.36

air vents ................................................ (up to the end of the DU)

3.2

ENG_UD17357_4

Aérateurs (sorties d’air) (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)

ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Air vents

AIR VENTS: air outlets (1/2)

Depending on the vehicle:

1 left-hand side air vent

2 left-hand side window demister

outlet

3 windscreen demister outlets

4 centre air vents

5 right-hand side air vent

6 right-hand side window demister

outlet

7 passenger footwell heater outlets

8 centre console air vents

9 air conditioning control panel

1 2

3 5 6

Jaune Noir Noir texte

3.3

ENG_UD17357_4

Aérateurs (sorties d’air) (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)

ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

AIR VENTS: air outlets (2/2)

Air flow

Turn control knob 1 (beyond the point

of resistance).

Up: maximum air flow.

Down: closed.

Turn control knob 3 (beyond the point

of resistance).

To the right: maximum air flow.

To the left: closed.

Direction

Right/left: move tabs 2 to the right or

left.

Up/down: lower or raise tabs 2.

Depending on the vehicle, the air

vents 4 may be replaced by a stor-

age compartment; refer to Section 3

“Passenger compartment storage/

fittings”.

To remove bad odours from your ve-

hicles, only use the systems designed

for this purpose. Consult an approved

Dealer.

Do not add anything to the

vehicle’s ventilation circuit

(for example, to remove

bad odours).

There is a risk of damage or of

fire.

heating system .....................................(up to the end of the DU)

air conditioning .....................................(up to the end of the DU)

ventilation .............................................(up to the end of the DU)

air conditioning .....................................(up to the end of the DU)

3.4

ENG_UD6312_1

Air conditionné (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Manual air conditioning

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (1/2)

1 2 3 4

The controls

1 Adjusting the air temperature

2 Adjusting the ventilation speed

3 Air conditioning.

4 Distribution of air in the passenger

compartment.

5 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen

and, depending on the vehicle, the

door mirrors.

6 Air recirculation.

Switching air conditioning on

or off

The air conditioning is switched on (in-

dicator light on) or off (indicator light off)

using button 3.

The air conditioning system is used

for:

– lowering the temperature inside the

passenger compartment;

– eliminating condensation more

quickly.

Distribution of air in the

passenger compartment

There are five air distribution options.

Turn control 4 to choose the distribution

option.

WThe air flow is directed to the

windscreen and the front side

window demisting vents.

iThe air flow is distributed be-

tween all the air vents, the

front side window demisting vents, the

windscreen demisting vents and the

footwells.

óThe air flow is directed mainly

towards the footwells.

GThe air flow is directed towards

the dashboard vents and the

footwells.

JAll the air flow is directed to the

dashboard vents.

rear screen de-icing/demisting ..............................(current page)

windscreen de-icing/demisting ..............................(current page)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

3.5

ENG_UD6312_1

Air conditionné (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Adjusting the ventilation

speed

Turn control 2 clockwise to increase the

air flow in the passenger compartment.

The passenger compartment is ven-

tilated by blown air. The blower deter-

mines how much air enters but vehicle

speed has a slight effect on this.

Switching the air

recirculation on

Press button 6: the integrated indicator

light comes on.

Under these conditions, air is taken

from the passenger compartment and

is recirculated, with no air being taken

from outside the vehicle.

Air recirculation is for:

– isolating the vehicle from the exter-

nal atmosphere (driving in polluted

areas, etc.);

– lowering the passenger compart-

ment temperature as quickly as pos-

sible.

“OFF" position:

the system is deactivated: the ventila-

tion speed for the passenger compart-

ment air is zero (vehicle stationary),

you can however still feel a slight flow

of air when the vehicle is moving.

Recommended demisting option:

Turn controls 1, 2 and 4 to the W

position.

This is the quickest option for de-icing

and demisting the side windows and

the windscreen.

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (2/2)

Prolonged use of air recirculation

can lead to condensation form-

ing on the side windows and wind-

screen, and discomfort due to the

use of non-renewed air in the pas-

senger compartment.

We therefore advise you to return to

normal mode (external air) as soon

as the air recirculation function is

no longer required, by pressing the

button 6 again.

The de-icing function cannot be used with the air recirculation mode to avoid any risk of condensation forming on the wind-

screen and triggers the air conditioning and the integrated indicator light 3 to come on.

1 2 3 4

air conditioning .....................................(up to the end of the DU)

heating system .....................................(up to the end of the DU)

temperature regulation .........................(up to the end of the DU)

ventilation .............................................(up to the end of the DU)

air conditioning .....................................(up to the end of the DU)

3.6

ENG_UD25147_1

Climatisation automatique (X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Automatic climate control

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (1/5)

Automatic mode

The automatic climate control system

guarantees comfort in the passen-

ger compartment and good visibility

(except in the event of extreme condi-

tions), whilst optimising consumption.

The system controls the ventilation

speed, air distribution, air recircula-

tion, and starting and stopping the air

conditioning and air temperature. This

mode consists of a choice of three pro-

grammes:

AUTO: allows the selected comfort

level to be best attained, depending on

the exterior conditions. Press button 3.

SOFT: gently brings the temperature to

the desired comfort level. The comfort

level is then maintained gently and si-

lently. Press button 2.

FAST: increases the operation of the

system to reach the desired comfort

level more quickly. Use this programme

when you have passengers in the rear.

Press button 4.

9 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen

and, depending on the vehicle, the

door mirrors.

10 “Clear View” function.

11 Air recirculation.

12 Ventilation speed.

13 Display.

7891011

The controls

1 and 6 Air temperature.

2, 3 and 4 Automatic programmes.

5 Distribution of air in the passenger

compartment.

7 Off button.

8 Air conditioning.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

3.7

ENG_UD25147_1

Climatisation automatique (X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (2/5)

Varying the ventilation speed

In automatic mode, the system uses

the most suitable amount of air to reach

and maintain the desired comfort level.

You can still adjust the ventilation speed

by pressing buttons 12 to increase or

reduce the ventilation speed.

In this case, the ventilation speed,

which is no longer controlled automat-

ically, appears in zone A on the dis-

play 13.

Some buttons have an operating

tell-tale which indicates the operat-

ing status.

Temperature adjustment

Press button 1 or 6 to raise or lower the

left-hand 1 or right-hand 6 temperature.

Pressing button 3 for more than two

seconds sets the passenger tempera-

ture to the driver’s temperature.

Special note: the highest and lowest

settings allow the system to produce

maximum hot or cold temperature

levels (“LO” and “HI” on display 13).

Clear View function

Press button 10: the integrated indica-

tor light comes on.

This function quickly demists and de-

ices the windscreen, the rear screen,

the front side windows, and the door

mirrors (depending on the vehicle). The

air conditioning and rear screen de-ic-

ing functions must be activated.

Press button 9 to stop the heated rear

screen operating; the integrated indica-

tor goes out.

You can change the ventilation speed

by pressing button 12.

To exit this function, press:

– button 10 again,

– one of either button 2, 3 or 4.

10 9

2 4

3.8

ENG_UD25147_1

Climatisation automatique (X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Jaune Noir Noir texte

The displayed temperature values

show a comfort level.

When starting the engine, increas-

ing or decreasing the value dis-

played will not allow the com-

fort level to be reached any more

quickly. The system will always op-

timise the temperature increase or

decrease (the ventilation system

does not start instantly at maximum

speed: it gradually increases). This

may take several minutes.

Generally speaking, unless there is

a particular reason not to, the dash-

board air vents should remain open.

You are recommended to use automatic mode by selecting one of the auto-

matic programmes AUTO, SOFT or FAST.

In automatic mode (indicator light for button 3 on), all heating and air conditioning

functions are controlled by the system.

You can also change the system selection, in this case, indicator light for button 3

will go out and the changed function, which is no longer controlled by the system,

is shown on display 13.

To return to automatic mode, press one of the AUTO, SOFT or FAST programmes.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (3/5)

Switching air conditioning on

or off

In automatic mode, the system switches

the air conditioning system on or off,

depending on the climate conditions.

Press switch 8 to switch off the air

conditioning; the integrated indicator

comes on and “AC OFF” is shown on

the display 13.

813

rear screen de-icing/demisting ..............................(current page)

windscreen de-icing/demisting ..............................(current page)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

3.9

ENG_UD25147_1

Climatisation automatique (X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (4/5)

Rear screen de-icing/

demisting

Press button 9: the integrated indica-

tor light comes on. This function per-

mits rapid demisting/de-icing of the rear

screen and de-icing of the door mirrors

(on equipped vehicles).

To exit this function, press button 9

again. Demisting automatically stops

by default.

WThe air flow is directed to the

windscreen and the front side

window demisting vents.

×The air flow is distributed be-

tween all the air vents, the

front side window demisting vents, the

windscreen demisting vents and the

footwells.

¿The air flow is directed mainly

towards the footwells.

¾The air flow is directed towards

the dashboard vents and the

footwells.

½All the air flow is directed to the

dashboard vents.

In this situation, the distribution of air in

the passenger compartment, which is

no longer automatically controlled, ap-

pears on the display.

Adjusting the distribution

of air in the passenger

compartment

There are five air distribution options.

Press switch 5 to scroll through them.

The arrows located in area B on the

display 13 combine to show you the

distribution selected:

B13

3.10

ENG_UD25147_1

Climatisation automatique (X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Manual use

Pressing button 11 allows air recircula-

tion to be forced, in which case the in-

tegrated warning light comes on as well

as warning light 14.

Prolonged use of this position may lead

to odours, caused by non-renewal of

air, and the formation of condensation

on the windows.

We therefore advise you to return to au-

tomatic mode as soon as the air recir-

culation function is no longer required,

by pressing button 11 again.

Stopping the system

Press button 7 to switch off the system;

in this case “OFF” is shown on the dis-

play 13. To switch the system on, press

one of the 2, 3 or 4 switches.

Recycling

This function is managed automati-

cally (operation is confirmed by warn-

ing light 14 on display 13), but you can

also activate it manually.

Note:

– during recirculation, air is taken from

the passenger compartment and

is recycled, with no air being taken

from outside the vehicle;

– air recirculation allows the external

atmosphere to be cut off (when driv-

ing in polluted areas, etc.);

– lowering the passenger compart-

ment temperature as quickly as pos-

sible.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (5/5)

The demisting/de-icing will still take

priority over the air recirculation.

2 3 4

71113 14

air conditioning .....................................(up to the end of the DU)

heating and air conditioning system ...................... (current page)

air conditioning .....................................(up to the end of the DU)

3.11

ENG_UD10081_2

Air conditionné : informations et conseils d’utilisation (X91 - B91 - K91 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Air conditioning: information and advice on use

AIR CONDITIONING: information and advice on use

Fuel consumption

You will normally notice an increase

in fuel consumption (especially

when driving in town) when the air

conditioning is operating.

For vehicles fitted with manual air

conditioning, switch off the system

when it is not required.

Advice for reducing

consumption and therefore

helping to preserve the

environment:

Drive with the air vents open and

the windows closed.

If the vehicle has been parked in

the sun, open the doors for a few

moments to let the hot air escape

before starting the engine.

Maintenance

Refer to the Maintenance Service

Booklet for your vehicle for the in-

spection frequency.

Operating faults

As a general rule, contact your ap-

proved Dealer in the event of an op-

erating fault:

– reduction in de-icing, demist-

ing or air conditioning per-

formance. This may be caused

by the passenger compartment

filter cartridge becoming clogged;

– no cold air is being produced.

Check that the controls are set

correctly and that the fuses are

sound. Otherwise, switch off the

system.

Advice on use

In some situations, (air conditioning

off, air recirculation activated, venti-

lation speed at zero or low, etc.) you

may notice that condensation starts

to form on the windows and wind-

screen.

If there is condensation, use the

“Clear View” function to remove it,

then use the air conditioning in auto-

matic mode to stop it forming again.

If the condensation does not clear,

use the FAST programme.

Do not open the refriger-

ant fluid circuit. The fluid

may damage eyes or skin.

Note

Presence of water under the ve-

hicle. After prolonged use of the air

conditioning system, it is normal for

water to be present under the vehi-

cle. This is caused by condensation.

electric windows ...................................(up to the end of the DU)

child safety.............................................................(current page)

children (safety) ..................................................... (current page)

sunroof..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

3.12

ENG_UD18900_4

Lève-vitres électriques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Jaune Noir Noir texte

These systems operate with the igni-

tion on or off, until one of the front doors

is opened (limited to about 3 minutes).

From the driver’s seat, use switch:

1 for the driver’s side;

2 for the front passenger side;

3 and 5 for the rear passenger win-

dows.

From the passenger seats, use

switch 6.

Note: if the window detects resistance

when closing (e.g.: fingers, branch of

a tree, etc.) it stops and then lowers

again by a few centimetres.

Electric windows/Electric sunroof

ELECTRIC WINDOWS/ELECTRIC PANORAMIC SUNROOF (1/3)

Electric windows

Press or pull the switch to raise or lower

a window to the desired height (the rear

windows do not open fully);

One-touch mode

This mode works in addition to the

operation of the electric windows de-

scribed previously. It either operates on

the front windows only, or on all the win-

dows.

Briefly press or pull the window switch

fully: the window is fully lowered or

raised. Pressing the switch again stops

the window moving.

Safety of rear occupants

The driver can disable op-

eration of the electric win-

dows and, depending on

the vehicle, the rear doors, by

pressing switch 4. The indicator

light integrated in the switch lights

up to confirm that the locks have

been activated.

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave your vehicle with the

RENAULT card inside and never

leave a child (or a pet) unsuper-

vised, even for a short while. They

may pose a risk to themselves or to

others by starting the engine, acti-

vating equipment such as the elec-

tric windows or by locking the doors.

If any part of the body becomes

trapped, reverse the direction of the

window immediately by pressing the

relevant switch.

Risk of serious injury.

Avoid resting any objects against

a half-open window: there is a risk

that the electric window could be

damaged.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

3.13

ENG_UD18900_4

Lève-vitres électriques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

ELECTRIC WINDOWS/ELECTRIC PANORAMIC SUNROOF (2/3)

Sunroof

– Open the sun blind

– To open slightly: turn button 9 to

position A;

– To open fully: turn button 9 to po-

sition B, C or D, depending on the

opening position required;

– To close: turn button 9 to position 0.

Sun blind

– to open: push handle 7 upwards

and guide the blind as it retracts;

– to close: pull handle 7 until it clicks

into the catch.

Special note

Your vehicle is equipped with an antip-

inch facility: when the sunroof encoun-

ters resistance whilst closing, (some-

body’s fingers, etc.) it stops and then

moves back several centimetres.

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave your vehicle

with the RENAULT card

inside and never leave a

child (or a pet) unsupervised, even

for a short while.

The reason for this is that the child

may endanger himself or others by

starting the engine, activating equip-

ment such as the window winders

for example, or locking the doors.

If a body part gets trapped, reverse

the direction of travel as soon as

possible by turning button 9 fully to

the right (position D).

Risk of serious injury.

3.14

ENG_UD18900_4

Lève-vitres électriques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

ELECTRIC WINDOWS/ELECTRIC PANORAMIC SUNROOF (3/3)

Precautions during use

– check that the sunroof is properly

closed before leaving your vehicle;

– clean the seal every three months

using products recommended by our

Technical Department;

– do not open the sunroof immedi-

ately after the vehicle has been in

the rain or after your car has been

washed.

– Vehicle with roof bars

As a general rule, if there is a load

on the roof, use of the sunroof is not

recommended.

Before using the sunroof, check the

objects and/or accessories (bike

racks, roof boxes, etc.) attached to

the roof bars: they should be prop-

erly arranged and secured and

should not interfere with the opera-

tion of the sunroof.

Contact your approved Dealer for

details of possible conversions.

Operating faults

Electric windows

In case of a fault when closing a window,

the system reverts to normal mode:

pull the switch concerned up as often

as necessary to fully close the window

(the window will close gradually), hold

the switch (still on the closure side) for

three seconds then lower and raise the

window fully to reinitialise the system.

If necessary, contact your approved

Dealer.

Electric sunroof

If the roof does not close, turn button 9

to the position 0 and then press button 8

until the roof is fully closed: consult an

approved Dealer.

Remote control window

closing

(for vehicles with one-touch windows

on all windows).

When you lock the doors from the out-

side, press the locking button on the

RENAULT card twice in quick suc-

cession, or on the driver's door in

hands-free mode, and all the windows

will close automatically.

It is recommended that the user only

operates the system when the vehi-

cle can be seen clearly and no one is

inside.

Note: locking the doors using the

RENAULT card deactivates hands-free

mode.

Closing windows can cause

serious injury.

If the vehicle is equipped

with this function, this action

will activate deadlocking.

Check that there is no-one

still inside the vehicle

Important: during this operation,

the sunroof anti-pinch facility is de-

activated. Contact your approved

dealer as soon as possible.

lighting:

interior .............................................(up to the end of the DU)

courtesy light ........................................(up to the end of the DU)

map reading lights ................................ (up to the end of the DU)

3.15

ENG_UD18902_3

Eclairage intérieur (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Manual window winders

Interior lighting

MANUAL WINDOW WINDERS/INTERIOR LIGHTING (1/2)

When the doors or luggage com-

partment are unlocked and opened

the courtesy and footwell lights

come on temporarily.

23 4

Courtesy light

Tilt switch 3 to move it to the position

for:

– permanent lighting;

– intermittent lighting, which comes

on when a door is opened. This

switches off after a time delay, once

the doors concerned have been

closed correctly;

– immediate switching off.

Map reading lights

(depending on vehicle)

Tilt switches 2 or 4.

Front door lights

Light 5 comes on when the door is

opened.

Manual window winders

Turn handle 1.

sun visor ................................................................ (current page)

courtesy mirrors ..................................................... (current page)

3.16

ENG_UD18902_3

Eclairage intérieur (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Luggage compartment light 9

Depending on the vehicle, light 9,

comes on when the luggage compart-

ment is opened.

Sun visor

INTERIOR LIGHTING (2/2)/SUN VISOR

Sun visor

Lower the sun visor 7 over the wind-

screen or unclip it and turn it over the

side window.

Courtesy mirrors

Slide cover 8, depending on the vehi-

cle, and the mirror is lit.

Glove box light 6

Light 6 comes on when the cover is

opened.

storage compartments ..........................(up to the end of the DU)

storage compartment............................(up to the end of the DU)

fittings ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

3.17

ENG_UD11880_3

Rangements / aménagements habitacle (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Passenger compartment storage space and fittings

Door pockets 1

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (1/4)

Nothing should be placed

on the floor area in front of

the driver as such objects

may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus

obstructing its use.

Driver and passenger

underfloor storage

compartments 2

This storage compartment can be used

to hold the vehicle documentation, etc.

Sun visor storage 3

This can be used for storing motorway

tickets, cards, etc.

Ensure that no hard, heavy

or pointed objects are

placed in the “open” storage

compartments in such a

way that they may fall onto passen-

gers during sudden turning, braking

or in the event of an accident.

armrest:

front .................................................................. (current page)

3.18

ENG_UD11880_3

Rangements / aménagements habitacle (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Centre console storage

compartments 6

Front centre armrest storage

compartment A

Press button 4 and lift the cover 5.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (2/4)

Passenger storage

compartment

Pull handle 7 to open it.

The glove box can hold A4-size docu-

ments, a large bottle of water, etc.

The storage compartment is ventilated

and refrigerated.

Ensure that no hard, heavy

or pointed objects are

placed in the “open” storage

compartments in such a

way that they may fall onto passen-

gers during sudden turning, braking

or in the event of an accident.

glove box ............................................................... (current page)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

3.19

ENG_UD11880_3

Rangements / aménagements habitacle (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Door pockets 8Storage compartment 9

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (3/4)

Rear armrest storage

Lower armrest 12 and, depending on

the vehicle, lift cover 11 using unlock-

ing handle 10.

3.20

ENG_UD11880_3

Rangements / aménagements habitacle (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (4/4)

Rear centre console storage

compartments 16

Depending on the vehicle, storage

compartment 16 may be replaced

by air vents; refer to Section 3 “Air

vents”.

Front seat storage

compartments 15

Clothes hooks 13

Grab handle 14

This offers support and can be held

when the vehicle is being driven.

Do not use it for getting into or out of

the vehicle.

ashtray ..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

cigar lighter ........................................... (up to the end of the DU)

accessories socket ............................... (up to the end of the DU)

3.21

ENG_UD11881_2

Cendriers-Allume cigares (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Accessories socket

Ashtray/cigar lighter

Cigar lighter 1

With the ignition on, push in cigar

lighter 1, it will spring back with a click

when it is ready. Pull it out to use. After

use, replace it without pushing it all the

way in.

ASHTRAY, CIGAR LIGHTER, ACCESSORIES SOCKET

Accessories sockets

You may use cigar lighter recess 1 or

socket 3 (depending on the vehicle).

They are designed for connecting ac-

cessories with a maximum power rating

of 120 Watts (voltage: 12V) which

have been approved by our Technical

Department.

If your vehicle is not fitted with a cigar lighter and an ashtray, these can be ob-

tained from an approved Dealer.

Ashtray 2

To open, lift the cover. To empty, pull the

ashtray towards you and it will be re-

leased from its housing.

Connect accessories

with a maximum power of

120 Watts only.

Fire hazard.

rear bench seat.....................................(up to the end of the DU)

rear seats

functions .........................................(up to the end of the DU)

3.22

ENG_UD21546_6

Banquette arrière (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Press button 1 and lower the

seatback(s) A.

Rear bench seat

To fold down the seatback

Ensure that the front seats are far

enough forward.

Lower the rear headrests (refer to the

information on the “Rear headrests” in

Section 1).

Place the seat belts 2 in their guides 3.

Sport tourer versions

Depending on the vehicle, seatback A

can be folded down on its own to allow

long or bulky objects to be transported.

REAR BENCH SEAT functions (1/3)

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is not being

driven.

Before moving the seat-

back, put seat belt 2 in belt

guide 3 to avoid damaging

it.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

3.23

ENG_UD21546_6

Banquette arrière (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

REAR BENCH SEAT functions (2/3)

Luggage compartment carpet level

adjustment

To adjust the level of the luggage com-

partment carpet in line with the seat-

backs, lift carpet 4 via the rear door;

height adjuster 5 is deployed auto-

matically. Fit the luggage compartment

carpet and unfold blanking covers 6.

When refitting the bench seat, push the

booster seat in at the same time as fit-

ting the luggage compartment carpet.

When refitting the seat-

back, make sure it is cor-

rectly locked in place.

If seat covers are fitted,

make sure these do not prevent the

seatback latch from locking in.

Make sure that the seat belts are

positioned correctly.

Reposition the headrests.

3.24

ENG_UD21546_6

Banquette arrière (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

When refitting the seat-

back, make sure it is cor-

rectly locked in place.

If seat covers are fitted,

make sure these do not prevent the

seatback latch from locking in.

Make sure that the seat belts are

positioned correctly.

Reposition the headrests.

The seat and the seatback may be

folded away to allow bulky objects to be

carried.

To fold away the seat base

Tilt seat base B against the front seats.

To fold down the seatback

After folding the seat base down,

remove the rear headrests (refer to the

section on “rear headrests”) then press

button 1 and lower the seatback(s) C.

In all situations, remove the rear

headrests (refer to the informa-

tion on the “Rear headrests” in

Section 1).

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is not being

driven.

REAR BENCH SEAT functions (3/3)

When moving the rear

bench seat, ensure that

nothing obstructs the an-

chorage points (part of the

body, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).

tailgate .................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

3.25

ENG_UD21547_2

Coffre à bagages (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Luggage compartment

TAILGATE

To open

Press button 1 and lift the tailgate.

To close

Pull down the tailgate using handle 2

inside the tailgate to assist you.

Opening manually from

inside the vehicle

Special note:

If it is impossible to unlock the tailgate,

it can be done from inside.

– access the luggage compartment by

folding forward the seatback(s) of

the rear bench seat,

– insert a pencil or similar object in

cavity 3 and slide the unit as shown

in the illustration,

– push the tailgate to open it.

rear parcel shelf ....................................(up to the end of the DU)

tailgate .................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

rear parcel shelf ....................................(up to the end of the DU)

3.26

ENG_UD21549_3

Tablette arrière (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Removal

Unhook the two cords 1 (tailgate side).

Rear parcel shelf

Do not place any objects,

especially heavy or hard

objects, on the parcel shelf.

These may pose a risk to

the vehicle occupants if the driver

has to brake suddenly or if the vehi-

cle is involved in an accident.

Lift rear parcel shelf 2 slightly and pull it

towards you.

To refit it, proceed in reverse order to

removal.

REAR PARCEL SHELF

Unclip mountings 3 on either side of

the parcel shelf, then remove the parcel

shelf via the luggage compartment.

To refit it, proceed in the reverse order

to removal.

luggage compartment cover ................. (up to the end of the DU)

rear parcel shelf ....................................(up to the end of the DU)

3.27

ENG_UD21548_2

Cache-bagages : versions break (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

To remove the flexible

section of the luggage cover

Pull handle 1 gently to release the pins

from their mounting points located on

each side of the luggage compartment.

Guide the luggage cover onto the roller.

Luggage compartment cover: sport tourer versions

Removing the luggage cover

Push the luggage compartment cover

to the left (movement A) and lift the

right-hand side of the inertia reel (move-

ment B).

To refit the luggage compartment cover,

insert the left-hand side, then push it to

the left (movement A) and lower the

right-hand side of the inertia reel into its

housing.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT COVER: sport tourer versions (1/2)

Do not place any heavy or solid objects on the luggage cover. These may

pose a risk to the vehicle occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly or

if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

3.28

ENG_UD21548_2

Cache-bagages : versions break (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Luggage compartment cover

storage

From the rear doors, lower the bench

seat seatback (refer to information on

the “Rear bench seat” in section 3).

Lift the luggage compartment carpet 2

and secure it by attaching straps 3 onto

hooks 4.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT COVER: sport tourer versions (2/2)

Store luggage compartment cover 6

behind the booster seat 5 in the dedi-

cated storage compartment.

storage compartments ..........................(up to the end of the DU)

tailgate .................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

3.29

ENG_UD25723_1

Rangement, aménagement coffre à bagages (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Anchorage points

(Three- and five-seater versions)

Hooks 2 located on each corner of the

luggage compartment, allow the load to

be secured.

Luggage compartment storage space/fittings

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (1/3)

Storage under carpet 1

(depending on vehicle)

To open, fold back carpet A.

2 2

Always place objects being trans-

ported so that the heaviest items

are resting against the back of the

rear bench seat.

Side straps

Side straps 3 are located either side of

the luggage compartment, and can be

used to store an oil can.

3.30

ENG_UD25723_1

Rangement, aménagement coffre à bagages (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Jaune Noir Noir texte

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (2/3)

Storage under carpet

(sport tourer version)

To access storage compartments 7,

fold back section B using handle 4 and,

depending on the vehicle, lift flap 6.

Anchorage points

(sport tourer version)

Hooks 5, located on either side of the

luggage compartment, allow the load to

be secured.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

3.31

ENG_UD25723_1

Rangement, aménagement coffre à bagages (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (3/3)

Separating the luggage

compartment

(sport tourer version)

The loading area can be separated.

Turn locks 8 situated on either side of

the luggage compartment to the first

notch. Lift divider C using handle 4;

when the bolts make contact, push the

divider and it will lock.

Maximum weight: 20 kg.

On the back there is an elastic strip 9 to

hold small objects vertically in position.

Always place objects being trans-

ported so that the heaviest items

are resting against the back of the

rear bench seat.

3.32

ENG_UD10820_2

Transport d’objets dans le coffre (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Transporting objects in the luggage compartment/Towing (towing equipment)

TRANSPORTING OBJECTS IN THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT/TOWING (towing equipment)

Always position the heavi-

est items directly on the

floor. Use the lashing points

on the floor of the luggage

compartment, if these are fitted to

the vehicle. The luggage should be

loaded in such a way that no items

will be thrown forward and strike the

occupants if the driver has to brake

suddenly. Fasten the rear seat belts,

even if the seats are not occupied.

Always place the objects to be trans-

ported so that their largest side rests

against the back of the rear bench

seat, for normal loads (Example A), or

against the back of the front seats when

the rear bench seatbacks are folded

down.

If you have to place objects on the

folded seat back, it is vital that you

remove the headrests before folding

the seat back so that it can be folded as

flat as possible against the seat.

Three-door version C = 875 mm

Five-door version C = 867 mm

Permissible nose weight, maximum

permissible towing weight, braked

and unbraked: refer to the information

on “Weights” in Section 6.

luggage retaining net ............................ (up to the end of the DU)

tailgate .................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

transporting objects

in the luggage compartment ........... (up to the end of the DU)

transporting objects

luggage net ..................................... (up to the end of the DU)

3.33

ENG_UD12949_1

Transport d’objets : filet de séparation (X95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Luggage net

TRANSPORTING OBJECTS: luggage net (1/2)

Luggage net A

On equipped vehicles, this can be used

when transporting animals or luggage,

to separate them from the passenger

section.

It can be positioned:

– behind the front seats;

– behind the rear bench seat.

Fitting the luggage net

behind the front seats

Inside the vehicle on each side:

– lift cover 1 to access the upper

mounting ring of the net;

– fix the net belt hook onto the ring;

– to access the lower mounting 2 for

the net the first time you use it, con-

tact an approved Dealer;

– once you have accessed the lower

mounting, attach the hook 2 of the

net strap to the ring;

– adjust the net strap so that it is taut.

The luggage net must not

be used to restrain or hold

objects.

Risk of injury.

3.34

ENG_UD12949_1

Transport d’objets : filet de séparation (X95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

TRANSPORTING OBJECTS: luggage net (2/2)

– in the luggage compartment, fix the

lower mounting strap hook on the

net to the anchorage point 4 located

under the luggage compartment

carpet;

– adjust the net strap so that it is taut.

The luggage net must not

be used to restrain or hold

objects.

Risk of injury.

Fitting the luggage net

behind the rear bench seat

Inside the vehicle on each side:

– Lift cover 3 to access the upper

mounting ring of the net;

– fix the net belt hook onto the ring;

roof bars ...............................................(up to the end of the DU)

roof rack

roof bars .......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

3.35

ENG_UD14413_3

Barres de toit (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Roof bars

ROOF BARS: ACCESS TO FIXING POINTS

Five-seater and sport tourer

versions

Open the doors to access the mount-

ing points 1.

For information on the range of

equipment adapted to your vehi-

cle, we advise you to consult an ap-

proved Dealer.

Refer to the fitting instructions for in-

formation on how to fit roof bars and

conditions of use.

Please keep these instructions with

the rest of the vehicle documenta-

tion.

Maximum permissible load on

roof rack: refer to the information

on “Weights” in Section 6.

Sport tourer versions

For vehicles fitted with original roof

bars, the roof bars are fixed and

must not be removed. To change

them contact an approved Dealer.

If original roof bars, ap-

proved by our Technical

Department, are supplied

with screws, only use these

screws for attaching the roof bars to

the vehicle.

Three door version

The fitting of roof bars is prohibited on

three door versions.

multimedia equipment ..........................(up to the end of the DU)

telephone ..............................................(up to the end of the DU)

navigation system .................................(up to the end of the DU)

hands-free telephone integrated control (up to the end of the DU)

navigation ............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

radio......................................................(up to the end of the DU)

3.36

ENG_UD6328_1

Equipement Multimédia (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_3

Multimedia equipment

MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT

Navigation system

The equipment described below may

or may not be fitted to the vehicle, and

its location may vary, depending on the

vehicle navigation system version.

1 Radio;

2 CD or DVD reader;

3 Central control;

4 Steering column control;

5 Micro.

Hands-free telephone

integrated control

On equipped vehicles, use micro-

phone 5 and steering column control 4.

To use this equipment, consult the

instructions for the equipment which

should be kept with the other vehi-

cle documentation.

Using the telephone

We remind you of the need

to conform to the legislation

in force concerning the use

of such equipment.

4.1

ENG_UD26113_2

Sommaire 4 (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

Section 4: Maintenance

Bonnet ........................................................................ 4.2

Engine oil level: ................................................................. 4.3

general information ........................................................ 4.3

topping up, filling .......................................................... 4.5

Engine oil change ............................................................... 4.6

Levels: ........................................................................ 4.8

engine coolant ............................................................ 4.8

brake fluid ................................................................ 4.9

windscreen/headlight washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10

Filters ......................................................................... 4.10

Tyre pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11

Battery ........................................................................ 4.12

Bodywork maintenance ........................................................... 4.13

Interior trim maintenance .......................................................... 4.15

bonnet...................................................(up to the end of the DU)

maintenance:

mechanical ...................................... (up to the end of the DU)

4.2

ENG_UD25657_1

Capot moteur (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

Bonnet

Opening the bonnet

Lift the bonnet; you will need to guide it

as it is held by a strut.

To open, pull handle 1, located on the

left-hand side of the dashboard.

Unlocking the bonnet catch

To release it, lift tab 2.

BONNET

Closing the bonnet

Check that nothing has been left in the

engine compartment.

To close the bonnet again, hold the

bonnet in the middle and guide it down,

allowing a 30 cm gap before it is closed,

then release it. It will latch automatically

under its own weight.

Check that it is correctly

locked.

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

In the event of an impact,

even slight, against the ra-

diator grille or bonnet, have

the bonnet catch checked

by an approved dealer as soon as

possible.

Do not press down on the

bonnet: there is a risk that

the bonnet will close inad-

vertently.

1After carrying out any work

in the engine compart-

ment, check that nothing

has been left behind (cloth,

tools, etc.).

These may damage the engine or

cause a fire.

Deactivate the Stop and

Start function for any opera-

tion performed in the engine

compartment.

engine oil .............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

oil change ............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

engine oil level ......................................(up to the end of the DU)

4.3

ENG_UD25658_1

Niveau huile moteur : généralités (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

Engine oil level:

general information

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information (1/2)

Minimum oil level warning on

the instrument panel

When the message “Checking control

functions” is displayed press button 3

or 4.

If the level is below minimum: the

message “Oil level” appears on the dis-

play along with squares 1 that are re-

placed with dashes 2 when the level

goes down.

Note: The detailed level cannot be dis-

played if the vehicle was previously

only driven for a short time.

if the level is at the minimum

The message “Top up oil level” and in-

strument panel.

It is vital to top up the oil as soon as

possible.

The display only warns the

driver if the oil level is at the

minimum level. It does not

inform the driver that the oil

level has exceeded the maximum

level as this can only be measured

using a dipstick.

It is normal for an engine to use oil for

lubrication and cooling of moving parts

and it is normal to top up the level be-

tween oil changes.

However, contact your approved

Dealer if more than 0.5 litres is being

consumed every 600 miles (1,000 km)

after the running in period.

Oil change frequency: check the oil

level from time to time and certainly

before any long journey to avoid the

risk of damaging your engine.

Reading the oil level

The oil level should be read with the ve-

hicle on level ground, after the engine

has been switched off for some time.

The dipstick must be used to read

the exact oil level and make sure

that the maximum level has not been

exceeded (risk of engine damage).

Refer to the following pages.

The instrument panel display only

alerts the driver when the oil level is at

its minimum.

Oil level

   

dipstick..................................................(up to the end of the DU)

4.4

ENG_UD25658_1

Niveau huile moteur : généralités (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information (2/2)

Reading the level using the

dipstick

– remove the dipstick and wipe with a

clean, lint-free cloth;

– push the dipstick in as far as it will

go (for vehicles equipped with a cap-

type dipstick C, screw the cap in as

far as it will go);

– take out the dipstick again;

– read the level: it should never fall

below minimum mark A or exceed

maximum mark B.

Once the operation has been com-

pleted, ensure that the dipstick is

pushed in as far as it will go or that

the “cap-type dipstick” is completely

screwed in.

Consult your approved Dealer at

once if you notice an abnormal or

repeated drop in any of the fluid

levels.

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

Maximum engine oil level

exceeded.

The oil level should only be read with

the dipstick as explained above.

If the oil level exceeds the maximum

level, do not start your vehicle and

contact an approved Dealer.

Under no circumstances

should maximum filling

level B be exceeded: this

could damage the engine

and the catalytic converter.

In order to prevent splashback, it is

recommended that a funnel be used

when topping up/filling with oil

Deactivate the Stop and

Start function for any opera-

tion performed in the engine

compartment.

engine oil .............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

oil change ............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

engine oil level ......................................(up to the end of the DU)

engine oil capacity ................................ (up to the end of the DU)

4.5

ENG_UD25724_1

Niveau huile moteur : appoint, remplissage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

topping up, filling

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (1/3)

Topping up/filling

The vehicle must be parked on level

ground and the engine should be cold

(for instance, before the engine is

started up for the first time in the day).

Engine oil grade

Refer to the Maintenance Service

Booklet for your vehicle.

– Unscrew cap 1;

– top up the level (as a guide, the ca-

pacity between the minimum and

maximum reading on the dipstick 2

is between 1.5 and 2 litres, depend-

ing on the engine);

– wait for approximately 10 minutes to

allow the oil to flow into the engine;

– check the level using the dipstick 2

(as described above).

Once the operation has been com-

pleted, ensure that the dipstick is

pushed in as far as it will go or that the

cap-type dipstick is completely screwed

in.

Do not exceed the max level and

do not forget to refit cap 1 and dip-

stick 2.

1 2

filter

oil filter ............................................(up to the end of the DU)

4.6

ENG_UD25724_1

Niveau huile moteur : appoint, remplissage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Engine oil change

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (2/3)

Topping up/filling

The vehicle must be parked on level

ground and the engine should be cold

(for instance, before the engine is

started up for the first time in the day).

Engine oil grade

Refer to the Maintenance Service

Booklet for your vehicle.

– Unscrew cap 1;

– top up the level (as a guide, the ca-

pacity between the minimum and

maximum reading on the dipstick 2

is between 1.5 and 2 litres, depend-

ing on the engine);

– wait for approximately 10 minutes to

allow the oil to flow into the engine;

– check the level using the dipstick 2

(as described above).

Once the operation has been com-

pleted, ensure that the dipstick is

pushed in as far as it will go or that the

cap-type dipstick is completely screwed

in.

Do not exceed the max level and

do not forget to refit cap 1 and dip-

stick 2.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

4.7

ENG_UD25724_1

Niveau huile moteur : appoint, remplissage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (3/3)/OIL CHANGE

Engine oil change: if you

are changing the oil when

the engine is hot, be careful

not to scald yourself if the

oil overflows.

Filling: take care when

topping up the oil that

no oil drips onto engine

components - risk of fire.

Remember to refit the cap securely

as there is a risk of fire if oil splashes

onto hot engine components.

Consult your approved Dealer at

once if you notice an abnormal or

repeated drop in any of the fluid

levels.

Never run the engine in an

enclosed space as exhaust

gases are poisonous.

Oil change

Service interval: refer to the

Maintenance Service Booklet for your

vehicle.

Average capacities for oil change

including oil filter

(for information)

Engine 1,2 TCe: 4.5 litres

1.4 TCe engine: 4.5 litres

1,6 16V engine: 5.1 litres

2.0 16V engine: 4.4 litres

2.0 T engine : 5.4 litres

1.5 dCi engine : 4.5 litres

1.9 dCi engine: 5.1 litres

2.0 dCi engine: 7.4 litres

Engine oil grade

Refer to the Maintenance Service

Booklet for your vehicle.

Deactivate the Stop and

Start function for any opera-

tion performed in the engine

compartment.

levels:

coolant ............................................................. (current page)

tanks and reservoirs

coolant ............................................................. (current page)

coolant ................................................................... (current page)

4.8

ENG_UD18903_5

Niveaux / filtres (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Levels:

engine coolant

LEVELS (1/3)

Coolant

With the engine switched off and on

level ground, the level when cold must

be between the “MINI" and "MAXI"

marks on coolant reservoir 1.

Top this level up when cold before it

reaches the MINI mark.

Checking intervals

Check the coolant level regularly

(very severe damage is likely to be

caused to the engine if it runs out of

coolant).

If the level needs to be topped up, only

use products approved by our Technical

Department which ensure:

– protection against freezing;

– anticorrosion protection of the cool-

ing system.

No operations should be

carried out on the cooling

circuit when the engine is

hot.

Risk of burns.

Consult your approved dealer at

once if you notice an abnormal or

repeated drop in any of the fluid

levels.

1Replacement intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Service

Booklet for your vehicle.

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

brake fluid .............................................................. (current page)

levels:

brake fluid ........................................................ (current page)

tanks and reservoirs

brake fluid ........................................................ (current page)

Jaune Noir Noir texte

4.9

ENG_UD18903_5

Niveaux / filtres (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

brake fluid

LEVELS (2/3)

Brake fluid level

The level should be read with the engine

switched off and on level ground. This

should be checked frequently, and any

time you notice even the slightest loss

in braking efficiency.

Level 1

It is normal for the level to drop as

the linings become worn, but it should

never drop below the MIN line.

If you wish to check the disc and drum

wear yourself, you should obtain the

document explaining the checking pro-

cedure from our network or from the

manufacturer’s website.

Topping up

After any operation on the hydraulic cir-

cuit, a specialist must replace the fluid.

Only use fluids approved by our

Technical Department (and taken from

a sealed container).

Replacement intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Service

Booklet for your vehicle.

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

Consult your approved dealer at

once if you notice an abnormal or

repeated drop in any of the fluid

levels.

levels:

windscreen washer reservoir ...........................(current page)

windscreen washer ................................................(current page)

filter

air filter .............................................................(current page)

filter

passenger compartment filter .......................... (current page)

filter

oil filter .............................................................(current page)

filter

diesel filter ........................................................ (current page)

tanks and reservoirs:

windscreen washer ..........................................(current page)

4.10

ENG_UD18903_5

Niveaux / filtres (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

windscreen/headlight washer reservoir

Filters

LEVELS (3/3)FILTERS

Windscreen/headlight washer

reservoir

Topping up

With the engine switched off, open

cap 1, fill until you can see the fluid,

then refit the cap.

Liquid

Screen wash product (product with an-

tifreeze in winter).

Jets

Use a tool such as a needle to adjust

the height of the windscreen washer

jets.

NOTE

Depending on the vehicle, to find

out the fluid level, open cap 1 and

pull out the dipstick.

Filters

The replacement of filter elements (air

filter, passenger compartment filter,

diesel filter, etc.) is scheduled in the

maintenance operations for your vehi-

cle.

Replacement intervals for filter el-

ements: refer to the Maintenance

Service Booklet for your vehicle.

tyre pressure.........................................(up to the end of the DU)

tyre pressures .......................................(up to the end of the DU)

tyres ......................................................(up to the end of the DU)

4.11

ENG_UD6333_1

Pression de gonflage des pneumatiques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

Tyre Pressure

TYRE PRESSURE

The tyre pressure is indicated on

label A affixed to the edge of the driv-

er’s door. Open the door to read it.

B: dimension of the tyres fitted to the

vehicle.

C: tyre pressures for the front wheels

(non-motorway).

D: tyre pressures for the rear wheels

(non-motorway).

E: tyre pressures for the front wheels

(motorway).

F: tyre pressures for the rear wheels

(motorway).

G: tyre pressure for the emergency

spare wheel.

H: emergency spare wheel tyre dimen-

sion if different to the four tyres fitted to

the vehicle.

Tyre safety and use of snow

chains

Refer to the information on “Tyres”

in Section 5 for the servicing con-

ditions and, depending on the ver-

sion, the use of chains.

Special note

For vehicles used fully laden

(maximum permissible all-up

weight) and towing a trailer. The

maximum speed must be limited

to 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre

pressure increased by 0.2 bar.

Refer to the information on “Weights”

in Section 6.

C D

When they need to be replaced, only tyres of the same make, size, type

and profile should be used.

Tyres fitted to the vehicle should either be identical to those fitted

originally or conform to those recommended by your approved

dealer.

battery...................................................(up to the end of the DU)

4.12

ENG_UD11753_3

Batterie (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

The battery 1 does not require any

maintenance.

Label A

Observe the indications on the battery:

– 2 naked flames and smoking forbid-

den;

– 3 eye protection required;

– 4 keep away from children;

– 5 explosive materials;

– 6 refer to the handbook;

– 7 corrosive materials.

Battery

The battery is a specific

type, please ensure it is

replaced with the same

type. Consult an approved

dealer.

Handle the battery with care

as it contains sulphuric acid,

which must not come into

contact with eyes or skin. If

it does, wash the affected area with

plenty of cold water. If necessary,

consult a doctor.

Ensure that naked flames, red hot

objects and sparks do not come into

contact with the battery as there is a

risk of explosion.

BATTERY

Depending on the vehicle, a system

continuously checks the battery charge

status. If the level drops, the message

“Battery low start engine” is displayed

on the instrument panel. In this case,

start the engine. Then the message

“Battery charging” appears on the in-

strument panel for the duration of the

charging time.

The charge status of your battery can

decrease especially if you use your ve-

hicle:

– for short journeys;

– for driving in town;

– when the temperature drops;

– after extended use of consumers

(radio etc.) with the engine switched

off.

Replacing the battery

As this operation is complex, we advise

you to contact an approved Dealer.

The engine may be hot

during operations in close

proximity. In addition, the

engine cooling fan may

start at any moment.

Risk of injury.

A23 4

567

maintenance:

bodywork ........................................(up to the end of the DU)

washing ................................................(up to the end of the DU)

paintwork

maintenance ................................... (up to the end of the DU)

anti-corrosion protection ........................................ (current page)

4.13

ENG_UD25392_1

Entretien de la carrosserie (X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

Bodywork maintenance

BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (1/2)

Allow rust to form following minor im-

pacts.

Use solvents not approved by our

Technical Department to remove stains

as this could damage the paintwork.

Drive frequently in snow or muddy con-

ditions without washing the vehicle,

particularly under the wheel arches and

body.

Minor impacts

You should take a minimum number of

precautions in order to safeguard your

vehicle against such risks and not to

lose the benefit of your vehicle’s anti-

corrosion protection.

What you should not do

Do not degrease or clean mechanical

components (e.g. the engine compart-

ment), underneath the body, parts with

hinges (e.g. inside the charging flap)

and painted plastic external fittings

(e.g. bumpers) using high-pressure

cleaning equipment or by spraying on

products not approved by our Technical

Department. If adequate precautions

are not taken, this could give rise to cor-

rosion or operational faults.

Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or

freezing temperatures.

Scrape off mud or dirt without pre-wet-

ting.

Allow dirt to accumulate on the exterior.

A well-maintained vehicle will last

longer. It is therefore recommended to

maintain the exterior of the vehicle reg-

ularly.

Protection against the effects

of corrosive agents

Although your vehicle has been treated

with very effective anti-corrosion prod-

ucts, it nevertheless remains subject to

the effects of different parameters.

Corrosive agents in the

atmosphere:

– atmospheric pollution (built-up and

industrial areas);

– saline atmospheres (near the sea,

particularly in hot weather);

– seasonal and damp weather condi-

tions, (e.g. road salt in winter, water

from road cleaners, etc.).

Abrasive action

Wind-borne dust and sand, mud, road

grit thrown up by other vehicles, etc.

4.14

ENG_UD25392_1

Entretien de la carrosserie (X95 - J95 - R95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

– bird droppings, which cause a

chemical reaction with the paint that

rapidly discolours paintwork and

may even cause the paint to peel

off;

Wash the vehicle immediately to

remove these marks since it is im-

possible to remove them by polish-

ing;

– salt, particularly in the wheel arches

and underneath the body after driv-

ing in areas where the roads have

been gritted.

Using a roller type car wash

Return the windscreen wiper stalk to

the Park position (refer to the informa-

tion on the “Windscreen washer, wiper”

in Section 1). Check the mounting of

external accessories, additional lights

and mirrors, and ensure that the wiper

blades are secured with adhesive tape.

Remove the radio aerial mast if your

vehicle is fitted with this equipment.

Remember to remove the tape and refit

the antenna after washing.

You should

Observe the vehicle stopping distances

when driving on gravelled surfaces to

prevent paint damage.

Repair, or have repaired quickly, areas

where the paint has been damaged, to

prevent corrosion spreading.

Remember to visit the body shop pe-

riodically in order to maintain your

anti-corrosion warranty. Refer to the

Maintenance Service Booklet.

Respect local regulations about wash-

ing vehicles (e.g. do not wash your ve-

hicle on a public highway).

Wash your car frequently, with the

engine off, with cleaning products rec-

ommended by the manufacturer (never

use abrasive products). Rinse thor-

oughly beforehand with a jet:

– spots of tree resin and industrial

grime;

– mud in the wheel arches and under-

neath the body which forms damp

patches;

BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (2/2)

If it is necessary to clean mechani-

cal components, hinges, etc., spray

them with products approved by our

Technical Department to protect them

after they have been cleaned.

Cleaning the headlights

As the headlights are made of plastic

“glass”, use a soft cloth or cotton wool

to clean them. If this does not clean

them properly, moisten the cloth with

soapy water, then wipe clean with a soft

damp cloth or cotton wool.

Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry

cloth.

Cleaning products containing alco-

hol must not be used.

We have selected special products

to care for your vehicle and you can

obtain these from the manufactur-

er’s accessory outlets.

maintenance:

interior trim ......................................(up to the end of the DU)

interior trim

maintenance ................................... (up to the end of the DU)

cleaning:

inside the vehicle ............................ (up to the end of the DU)

4.15

ENG_UD22866_8

Entretien des garnitures intérieures (X35 - X45 - X65 - J77 - X81 - J81 - X85 - X91 - B91 - K91 - D91 - X83 - X61 - X77 ph2 - X95 - B95 - D95 - E95 - K95 - J95 - R95 - ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

Interior trim maintenance

Glass instrument panel

(e.g. instrument panel, clock, exterior

temperature display, radio display, etc.)

Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool).

If this does not clean it properly, use a

soft cloth (or cotton wool) slightly mois-

tened with soapy water and then wipe

clean with a soft damp cloth or cotton

wool.

Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry

cloth.

Cleaning products containing alco-

hol must not be used under any cir-

cumstances.

Seat belts

These must be kept clean.

Use products selected by our Technical

Department (Approved outlets) or

warm, soapy water and a sponge and

wipe with a dry cloth.

Detergents or dyes must not be used

under any circumstances.

INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (1/2)

Textiles (seats, door trim, etc)

Vacuum-clean the textiles regularly.

Liquid stain

Use soapy water.

Dab lightly (never rub) with a soft cloth,

rinse and remove the excess.

Solid or pasty stain

Carefully remove the excess solid or

pasty material immediately with a

spatula (working from the edges to the

centre to avoid spreading the stain).

Clean as for a liquid stain.

Special instructions for sweets or

chewing gum

Put an ice cube on the stain to solidify

it, then proceed as for a solid stain.

A well-maintained vehicle will last

longer. It is therefore recommended to

maintain the interior of the vehicle regu-

larly.

A stain should always be dealt with

swiftly.

Whatever type of stain is on the trim,

use cold (or warm) soapy water with

natural soap.

Detergents (washing-up liquid, pow-

dered products, alcohol-based prod-

ucts) should not be used.

Use a soft cloth.

Rinse and soak up the excess.

For further recommendations for

maintaining the interior, and/or for

any unsatisfactory results, please

see an authorised dealer.

4.16

ENG_UD22866_8

Entretien des garnitures intérieures (X35 - X45 - X65 - J77 - X81 - J81 - X85 - X91 - B91 - K91 - D91 - X83 - X61 - X77 ph2 - X95 - B95 - D95 - E95 - K95 - J95 - R95 - ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_4

You are strongly recom-

mended not to use high-

pressure or spray cleaning

equipment inside the pas-

senger compartment: use of such

equipment could impair the correct

functioning of the electrical or elec-

tronic components in the vehicle, or

have other detrimental effects.

INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (2/2)

You should not:

You are strongly advised not to po-

sition objects such as deodorants,

scents, etc. near air vents, as this could

damage your dashboard trim.

Removal/replacing removable

equipment originally fitted in

the vehicle

If you need to remove equipment in

order to clean the passenger com-

partment (for example, mats), always

ensure that they are correctly refitted

and are the right way around (the driv-

er’s mat should be fitted on the driver’s

side, etc.) and fit them with the compo-

nents supplied with the equipment (for

example, the driver mat should always

be fixed using the pre-fitted mounting

components).

With the vehicle stationary, ensure that

nothing will impede driving (anything

obstructing the pedals, heel wedged by

the mat, etc.).

5.1

ENG_UD26114_2

Sommaire 5 (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Section 5: Practical advice

Puncture ...................................................................... 5.2

Emergency spare wheel .......................................................... 5.2

Tyre inflation kit ................................................................. 5.3

Tool kit (jack, wheelbrace, etc.) ..................................................... 5.6

Wheel trim ..................................................................... 5.6

Changing a wheel ............................................................... 5.7

Tyres (tyre and wheel safety, use in winter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9

Headlights (changing bulbs) ....................................................... 5.12

Rear lights (changing bulbs) ....................................................... 5.15

Indicator lights (changing bulbs) .................................................... 5.20

Interior lights (changing bulbs) ..................................................... 5.21

Fuses ......................................................................... 5.23

Battery ........................................................................ 5.25

RENAULT card: battery ........................................................... 5.27

Fitted audio equipment ........................................................... 5.28

Accessories .................................................................... 5.29

Wipers (replacing blades) ......................................................... 5.30

Towing ........................................................................ 5.31

Operating faults ................................................................. 5.33

emergency spare wheel .......................(up to the end of the DU)

puncture................................................(up to the end of the DU)

5.2

ENG_UD25648_4

Roue de secours (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Puncture

Emergency spare wheel

PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL

Special note:

The Tyre Pressure Monitor function

does not check the emergency spare

wheel (the wheel replaced by the emer-

gency spare wheel disappears from the

instrument panel display).

Refer to the information on the “Tyre

pressure monitor” in Section 2.

In the event of a puncture,

depending on the vehicle,

you will have:

An emergency spare wheel or tyre in-

flation kit (refer to the information on the

following pages).

Emergency spare wheel

This is located in the luggage compart-

ment. To access it:

– open the tailgate;

– depending on the vehicle, unscrew

the anchorage points;

– fold back the luggage compartment

carpet using tab 1;

– unscrew the central mounting;

– remove the emergency spare wheel.

If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years, have it checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is

safe to use.

Vehicles fitted with an emergency spare wheel which is different to the four other wheels:

– Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel to the same vehicle.

– Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a wheel identical to the original one.

– When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary measure, the driving speed must not exceed the speed

indicated on the label on the wheel.

– Fitting an emergency spare wheel may alter the way the vehicle usually runs. Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration and

reduce your speed when cornering.

– If you need to use snow chains, fit the emergency spare wheel to the rear axle and check the tyre pressure.

tyre inflation kit......................................(up to the end of the DU)

5.3

ENG_UD21559_4

Kit de gonflage (X95 - B95 - D95 - L38 - X38 - X32 - B32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Tyre inflation kit

TYRE PRESSURE KIT (1/3)

The kit is only approved for

inflating the tyres of the ve-

hicle originally equipped

with the kit.

It must never be used to inflate

the tyres of another vehicle, or any

other inflatable object (rubber ring,

rubber boat, etc.).

Avoid spillage on skin when han-

dling the repair liquid bottle. If drop-

lets do leak out, rinse them off with

plenty of water.

Keep the repair kit away from chil-

dren.

Do not dispose of the empty bottle

in the countryside. Return it to your

approved dealer or to a recycling or-

ganisation.

The bottle has a limited service

life which is indicated on its label.

Check the expiry date.

Contact an approved dealer to re-

place the inflation tube and repair

product bottle.

The kit repairs tyres when

tread A has been dam-

aged by objects smaller

than 4 mm. It cannot repair

all types of puncture, such as cuts

larger than 4 mm, or cuts in tyre

sidewall B.

Ensure also that the wheel rim is in

good condition.

Do not pull out the foreign body

causing the puncture if it is still in

the tyre.

Do not attempt to use the

inflation kit if the tyre has

been damaged as a result

of driving with a puncture.

You should therefore carefully check

the condition of the tyre sidewalls

before any operation.

Driving with underinflated, flat or

punctured tyres can be dangerous

and may make the tyre impossible

to repair.

This repair is temporary

A tyre which has been punctured

should always be inspected (and re-

paired, where possible) as soon as

possible by a specialist.

When taking a tyre which has been

repaired using this kit to be replaced,

you must inform the specialist.

When driving, vibration may be felt

due to the presence of the repair

product injected into the tyre.

5.4

ENG_UD21559_4

Kit de gonflage (X95 - B95 - D95 - L38 - X38 - X32 - B32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Depending on the vehicle, remove the

central partition in the storage compart-

ment to access the inflation kit.

Open the kit, remove caps 1 and 3 (the

cap must not be removed from the

bottle) then screw bottle 2 to its base 3.

With the engine running and the

parking brake applied,

– unscrew the valve cap on the wheel

concerned and screw inflation

adapter 6 onto the valve;

– connect adapter 8 to the accessories

socket on the dashboard of the vehi-

cle;

– press switch 5 to inflate the tyre to

the recommended pressure (check

the label affixed to the edge of the

driver’s door);

– after a maximum of 5 minutes, stop

inflating and read the pressure (on

pressure gauge 4);

Note: while the bottle is emptying

(approximately 30 seconds), pres-

sure gauge 4 will briefly indicate a

pressure of 6 bar, then the pressure

will drop.

TYRE PRESSURE KIT (2/3)

2– adjust the pressure: to increase

it, continue inflating with the kit, to

reduce it, turn button 7 located on

the inflation adapter.

If a minimum pressure of 1.8 bar is

not reached after 15 minutes, repair

is not possible; do not drive the ve-

hicle but contact an approved dealer.

Depending on the vehicle, in the event

of a puncture, use the kit located under-

neath the luggage compartment carpet.

Before using this kit, park

the vehicle at a sufficient

distance from traffic, switch

on the hazard warning

lights, apply the handbrake, ask all

passengers to leave the vehicle and

keep them away from traffic.

If the vehicle is parked on

the hard shoulder, you must

warn other road users of

your vehicle’s presence

with a warning triangle or with other

devices as per the legislation apply-

ing to the country you are in.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

5.5

ENG_UD21559_4

Kit de gonflage (X95 - B95 - D95 - L38 - X38 - X32 - B32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

TYRE PRESSURE KIT (3/3)

– affix driving recommendation label 9

to the dashboard where it can easily

be seen by the driver;

– store the kit;

– after the first inflation procedure the

tyre will still be leaking; it is vital to

drive in order to plug the hole;

– start immediately and drive at be-

tween 12 and 36 mph (20 and

60 km/h) to distribute the product

evenly throughout the tyre, stopping

after a distance of 2 miles (3 kilome-

tres) to check the pressure;

– If the pressure is above 1.3 bar but

lower than the recommended pres-

sure, readjust it (refer to the label

affixed to the edge of the driver’s

door), otherwise contact an ap-

proved dealer: repair is not possible.

Note: after using the inflation kit, you

should visit an approved Dealer to re-

place the inflation hose and the bottle

of repair product.

Precautions when using the

kit

The kit should not be operated for more

than 15 consecutive minutes.

Nothing should be placed

around the driver’s feet

as such objects may slide

under the pedals during

sudden braking manoeuvres and

obstruct their use.

Once the tyre is inflated correctly:

– stop using the kit;

– close the integrated cap on the bottle

again;

– disconnect adapter 8;

Following repair with the kit,

do not travel further than

120 miles (200 km). In addi-

tion, reduce your speed and

under no circumstances exceed

48 mph (80 km/h). The sticker,

which you must affix in a prominent

position on the dashboard, reminds

you of this.

Depending on the country or local

legislation, a tyre repaired with the

inflation kit may need to be replaced.

Please be aware that a

poorly tightened or miss-

ing valve cap can make the

tyres less airtight and lead

to pressure loss.

Always use valve caps identical to

those fitted originally and tighten

them fully.

tool kit ................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

hubcap tool ........................................... (up to the end of the DU)

jack ....................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

puncture................................................(up to the end of the DU)

wheelbrace ........................................... (up to the end of the DU)

trims ......................................................(up to the end of the DU)

emergency spare wheel .......................(up to the end of the DU)

wheelbrace ............................................................ (current page)

5.6

ENG_UD18915_3

Bloc-outils (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Tool kit (jack, wheelbrace, etc.)

Hubcap

TOOL KIT/WHEEL TRIM – WHEEL

The tool kit is located in the luggage

compartment: lift the carpet.

The tools included in the tool kit depend

on the vehicle.

Wheelbrace 1

Jack 2

When replacing the jack, fold it cor-

rectly and position the wheelbrace cor-

rectly before replacing it in its position.

Hubcap tool 3

This tool is used to remove the wheel

trims.

Wheel bolt guide 4

To finish loosening or starting to tighten

the wheel bolts.

Towing hitch 5

Refer to the information on “Towing” in

Section 5.

Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as they may come

loose under braking. After use, check that all the tools are correctly

clipped into the tool kit, then position it correctly in its housing: there is a

risk of injury.

If wheel bolts are supplied in the tool kit, only use these bolts for the emergency

spare wheel: refer to the label affixed to the emergency spare wheel.

The jack is designed for wheel changing purposes only. Under no circumstances

should it be used for carrying out repairs underneath the vehicle or to gain access

to the underside of the vehicle.

Wheel trim

Remove it using the hubcap tool 3 by

connecting the hook in the recess pro-

vided next to the valve 6 (to attach the

metal clip).

To refit wheel trim, align it with valve 6.

Push the retaining hooks in fully, start-

ing with side B near the valve, followed

by C and D, finishing at E opposite the

valve.

Note: if you are using anti-theft bolts,

refer to the information on “Changing a

wheel”.

changing a wheel..................................(up to the end of the DU)

puncture................................................(up to the end of the DU)

lifting the vehicle

changing a wheel ............................(up to the end of the DU)

5.7

ENG_UD18916_4

Changement de roue (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Offer up the jack 4 horizontally; the jack

head must be lined up with jacking

point 1 located on the underside of the

sill, closest to the wheel concerned, as

shown by arrow 2.

Start cranking the jack up by hand to

align the base plate (which should be

pushed slightly under the vehicle).

Turn the wheelbrace until the wheel lifts

off the ground.

Changing a wheel

Switch on the hazard warn-

ing lights.

Keep the vehicle away from

traffic and on a level sur-

face where it will not slip (if neces-

sary, place a solid support under the

jack base).

Apply the parking brake and engage

a gear (first or reverse, or P for auto-

matic transmissions).

Ask all the passengers to leave the

vehicle and keep them away from

traffic.

CHANGING A WHEEL (1/2)

To prevent any risk of injury

or damage to the vehicle,

only crank the jack until the

wheel you are replacing is

a maximum of 3 centimetres off the

ground.

If the vehicle is parked on

the hard shoulder, you must

warn other road users of

your vehicle’s presence

with a warning triangle or with other

devices as per the legislation apply-

ing to the country you are in.

Vehicles equipped with a jack

and wheelbrace

If necessary, remove the wheel trim.

Use the wheelbrace 3 to slacken off the

wheel bolts. Position it so as to be able

to push from above.

If the vehicle is not equipped with a

jack or wheelbrace, you can obtain

these from your approved dealer.

5.8

ENG_UD18916_4

Changement de roue (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Undo the bolts and take off the wheel.

Fit the emergency spare wheel onto

the hub and rotate it until the mounting

holes in the wheel coincide with those

of the hub.

If bolts are supplied with the emergency

spare wheel, only use these bolts for

the emergency spare wheel. Tighten

the bolts, checking that the wheel is

correctly positioned on its hub and

lower the jack.

With the wheel on the ground, tighten

the bolts fully and have the tightness

of the bolts checked (tightening torque:

110 N.m) and the emergency spare

wheel pressure checked as soon as

possible.

CHANGING A WHEEL (2/2)

Anti-theft bolt

If you use anti-theft bolts, fit these

nearest the valve (wheel trim may

not be able to fit).

If you have a puncture, re-

place the wheel as soon as

possible.

A tyre which has been punc-

tured should always be inspected

(and repaired, where possible) by a

specialist.

tyres ......................................................(up to the end of the DU)

wheels (safety) .....................................(up to the end of the DU)

5.9

ENG_UD20171_4

Pneumatiques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Tyres (tyre and wheel safety, use in winter)

TYRES (1/3)

Maintaining the tyres

The tyres must be in good condition

and the tread form must have sufficient

depth; tyres approved by our Technical

Department have wear warning strips 1

that are indicators moulded into the

tread at several points.

Tyre and wheel safety

The tyres are the only contact between

the vehicle and the road, so it is essen-

tial to keep them in good condition.

You must make sure that your tyres

conform to local road traffic regulations.

When the tyre tread has been worn to

the level of the wear indicators, they

become visible 2: it is then necessary

to replace your tyres because the tread

rubber is no more than 1.6 mm deep,

resulting in poor roadholding on wet

roads.

An overloaded vehicle, long journeys

by motorway, particularly in very hot

weather, or continual driving on poorly

surfaced minor roads will lead to more

rapid tyre wear and affect safety.

When they need to be re-

placed, only tyres of the

same make, size, type and

profile should be used.

Tyres fitted to the vehicle should

either be identical to those fitted

originally or conform to those

recommended by your approved

dealer.

Incidents which occur when

driving, such as striking the

kerb, may damage the tyres

and wheel rims, and could

also lead to misalignment of the

front or rear axle geometry. In this

case, have the condition of these

checked by an approved dealer.

tyre pressure..........................................................(current page)

5.10

ENG_UD20171_4

Pneumatiques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Tyre pressures

Adhere to the tyre pressures (including

the emergency spare wheel). The tyre

pressures should be checked at least

once a month and additionally before

any long journey (refer to the label af-

fixed to the edge of the driver’s door).

Pressures should be checked when the

tyres are cold; ignore higher pressures

which may be reached in hot weather

or following a fast journey.

If tyre pressures cannot be checked

when the tyres are cold, the normal

pressures must be increased by 0.2 to

0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).

Never deflate a hot tyre.

Special note

Depending on the vehicle, there may

be an adapter which needs to be posi-

tioned on the valve before air is added.

Fitting new tyres

Emergency spare wheel

Refer to the information on the

“Emergency spare wheel” and in-

structions on “Changing a wheel” in

Section 5.

TYRES (2/3)

Incorrect tyre pressures

lead to abnormal tyre wear

and unusually hot running.

These are factors which

may seriously affect safety and lead

to:

– poor road holding,

– risk of bursting or tread separa-

tion.

The pressure depends on the load

and the speed of use. Adjust the

pressure according to the condi-

tions of use (refer to the label affixed

to the edge of the driver’s door).

Please be aware that a

poorly tightened or miss-

ing valve cap can make the

tyres less airtight and lead

to pressure loss.

Always use valve caps identical to

those fitted originally and tighten

them fully.

For safety reasons, this op-

eration must be carried out

by a specialist.

Fitting different tyres may

change your vehicle as follows:

– It may mean that your vehicle no

longer conforms to current regu-

lations;

– It may change the way it handles

when cornering;

– It may cause the steering to be

heavy;

– It may affect the use of snow

chains.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

5.11

ENG_UD20171_4

Pneumatiques (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Use in winter

Chains

For safety reasons, fitting snow

chains to the rear axle is strictly for-

bidden.

Chains cannot be fitted to tyres which

are larger than those originally fitted to

the vehicle.

Snow or Winter tyres

We would recommend that these be

fitted to all four wheels to ensure that

your vehicle retains maximum adhe-

sion.

Warning: These tyres sometimes have

a specific direction of rotation and a

maximum speed index which may be

lower than the maximum speed of your

vehicle.

TYRES (3/3)

In all cases, we would recommend

that you contact an approved dealer

who will be able to advise you on

the choice of equipment which is

most suitable for your vehicle.

Changing a wheel

As the tyre pressure moni-

tor may take several min-

utes following driving to cor-

rectly determine the positions of the

wheels and the pressure values,

check the tyre pressures following

any operation.

18” wheels cannot be

fitted with chains.

If you wish to fit snow

chains, you must use spe-

cial equipment.

Consult an approved Dealer.

Studded tyres

This type of equipment may only be

used for a limited period and as laid

down by local legislation. It is neces-

sary to observe the speed specified by

current legislation.

These tyres must, at a minimum, be

fitted to the two front wheels.

lights

front ................................................. (up to the end of the DU)

lights

changing bulbs ................................ (up to the end of the DU)

changing a bulb .................................... (up to the end of the DU)

indicators .............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

bulbs

changing ......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

lights:

dipped beam headlights .................. (up to the end of the DU)

lights:

direction indicators ..........................(up to the end of the DU)

lights:

main beam headlights ..................... (up to the end of the DU)

bulbs

changing ......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

5.12

ENG_UD25725_1

Projecteurs avant : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Jaune Noir Noir texte

Headlights (changing bulbs)

FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/3)

After opening the bonnet, pull tool A

upwards. Remove the two screws 1

from the headlight using the tool.

Pull the headlight forwards, sliding it in

its rails up to the end stop.

After refitting the light, tighten the

screws 1 and reposition the tool cor-

rectly in its housing.

Direction indicator lights

Rotate the bulb holder B to unlock it.

Bulb type: PY21W.

Dipped beams

Halogen dipped beam headlight

Unlock the two springs D, remove

the cover, then unclip the spring 3 to

remove the bulb 4.

Bulb type: H7.

It is essential to use anti U.V. 55W

bulbs so as not to damage the plastic

on the headlights.

B C D E 32 45

Due to the danger involved

in handling high-voltage de-

vices, this type of bulb must

be replaced by an approved

dealer.

Do not touch the bulb glass. Hold it

by its base.

When the bulb has been changed,

make sure you refit the cover correctly.

Discharge bulb dipped beam

headlight

Bulb type: D1S.

Deactivate the Stop and

Start function for any opera-

tion performed in the engine

compartment.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

5.13

ENG_UD25725_1

Projecteurs avant : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

To comply with current legislation,

or as a precaution, you can obtain

an emergency kit from an approved

dealer containing a set of spare

bulbs and fuses.

FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs (2/3)

Daytime running light

Remove the cover C, unlock the bulb

holder 2 by rotating it.

Bulb type: P21W.

Main beam headlight

Remove the cover E, press the bulb

holder 5 downwards to unlock it.

Bulb type: H7.

BC D E 32 45

B 6

Front side light

Remove the cover E and pull the bulb

holder 6.

Bulb type: W5W.

5.14

ENG_UD25725_1

Projecteurs avant : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs (3/3)

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

Daytime running lights 7

Please see an authorised dealer.

Front fog lights 8

The front bumper needs to be removed;

consult an approved Dealer.

Additional lights

If you wish to fit fog lights or long range

headlights to your vehicle, consult an

approved Dealer.

Any operation on (or modi-

fication to) the electrical

system must be performed

by an approved dealer

since an incorrect connection might

damage the electrical equipment

(harness, components and in partic-

ular the alternator). In addition, your

Dealer has all the parts required for

fitting these units.

bulbs

changing ......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

changing a bulb .................................... (up to the end of the DU)

lights:

direction indicators ...........................................(current page)

lights:

side lights .........................................................(current page)

lights:

brake lights ......................................................(current page)

lights:

reversing lights ................................................. (current page)

lights:

fog lights ..........................................................(current page)

indicators:

direction indicators ...........................................(current page)

bulbs

changing ......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

5.15

ENG_UD18877_3

Feux arrière et latéraux : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Rear lights (changing bulbs)

REAR LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/6)

– loosen nut 1, press down on it to

release the front of the light (move-

ment A) then remove the nut;

– from the outside, pull the light to-

wards you (movement B);

– remove the bulb holder 3 by releas-

ing the clips 4.

Direction indicator lights 5

Bulb type: PY21W.

Side light and brake light 6

Bulb type: P21/5W.

Refitting

To refit, proceed in the reverse order,

taking care not to damage the wiring.

Five-door versions

Direction indicator lights/brake and

side lights

– Unclip the cover to access nuts 1

and 2;

– unscrew nut 2 without removing it

completely;

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

5.16

ENG_UD18877_3

Feux arrière et latéraux : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Jaune Noir Noir texte

REAR LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (2/6)

Five-door versions

(continued)

Fog lights/side lights and reversing

lights

– From the luggage compartment,

unclip flap 7, then remove the

bolts 8.

– Lower the tailgate, then pull light 9

towards the rear to release it.

– Unscrew the bulb holder for the bulb

concerned.

Reversing light 10

Bulb type: W16W.

Fog light/side light 11

Bulb type: P21/4W.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

5.17

ENG_UD18877_3

Feux arrière et latéraux : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Three-door versions

– Unclip the access flap;

– unscrew nuts 12 and 13;

– from the outside, remove bolt 14,

then pull on the light;

– remove the bulb holder by releasing

the clips 15;

16 Side light/stop light

Bulb type: P21/5W.

17 Direction indicator light

Bulb type: PY21W.

18 Reversing light

Bulb type: P21W.

Rear fog light

Undo bulb holder 19, turning it towards

the centre of the vehicle by accessing it

from underneath.

Bulb type: P21W.

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

REAR LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (3/6)

13 14

5.18

ENG_UD18877_3

Feux arrière et latéraux : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Jaune Noir Noir texte

REAR LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (4/6)

Sport tourer Versions

Side lights/reversing lights and fog

lights

– From the luggage compartment,

unclip flap 20 (movement C), then

remove the bolts .

– Lower the tailgate, then pull light 21

towards the rear to release it.

– Turn the bulb holder of the bulb con-

cerned a quarter of a turn.

Side light 22

Bulb type: W5W.

Reversing light 23

Bulb type: P21W.

Fog light 24

Bulb type: H21W.

Refitting

To refit, proceed in the reverse order,

taking care not to damage the wiring.

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

5.19

ENG_UD18877_3

Feux arrière et latéraux : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

REAR LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (5/6)

Side light and brake light 28

Bulb type: P21/5W.

Direction indicator lights 29

Bulb type: PY21W.

Estate versions

(continued)

Brake and side lights/direction

indicator lights

– Unclip covers 25 to access the nuts;

– unscrew the 2 nuts;

– from the outside, pull the light to-

wards you;

– remove the bulb holder 27 by releas-

ing the clips 26.

side indicator lights

changing bulbs ................................................. (current page)

lights:

number plate lights ..........................................(current page)

5.20

ENG_UD18877_3

Feux arrière et latéraux : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Rear lights (changing bulbs)

REAR LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS: changing bulbs (6/6)

Indicator lights 33

– Unclip indicator light 33 (using a

flat-blade screwdriver type tool po-

sitioned at D to move the indicator

light towards the front of the vehicle);

– turn the bulb holder a quarter of a

turn and take out the bulb.

Bulb type: W5W.

Number plate lights 32

– Unclip light 32 by pressing tab 31;

– remove the light cover to gain access

to the bulb.

Bulb type: W5W.

High level brake light 30

Consult an approved Dealer.

23 33

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

courtesy light ........................................(up to the end of the DU)

lighting:

interior .............................................(up to the end of the DU)

5.21

ENG_UD21555_3

Eclairage intérieur : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Interior lights (changing bulbs)

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (1/2)

Courtesy light

– Position the 3 switches in the central

position;

– move the courtesy light backwards

(movement A) then tilt the front

downwards (movement B);

– when removing the courtesy light,

ensure that you do not pull the elec-

trical wires;

– unclip the lens 1;

Note: to remove the defective bulb, you

can use a flat-blade screwdriver or sim-

ilar.

Bulb type: W5W.

Glove box light

Open the access cover 3, you can then

unclip the bulb holder more easily 4.

Bulb type: C5W.

Door lights

Unclip light 2 (using a flat-blade screw-

driver or similar).

Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn

and take out the bulb.

Bulb type: W5W.

5.22

ENG_UD21555_3

Eclairage intérieur : remplacement des lampes (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

Luggage compartment light

Unclip the light at 5 using a flat-blade

screwdriver or similar.

Disconnect the light.

Press tab 6 to release lens 8 and

access bulb 7.

Bulb type: W5W.

INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (2/2)

678

fuses ..................................................... (up to the end of the DU)

5.23

ENG_UD23613_2

Fusibles (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Fuse box

If any electrical component does not

work, check the condition of the fuses.

Unclip cover A or B (depending on ve-

hicle).

Tweezers 1

Remove the fuse using tweezers 1, lo-

cated at the back of flap A or B.

To remove the fuse from the tweezers,

slide the fuse to the side.

It is not advisable to use the free fuse

locations.

Fuses

Check the fuse in question

and replace it, if neces-

sary, by a fuse of the same

rating.

If a fuse is fitted where the rating is

too high, it may cause the electrical

circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the

event of an item of equipment using

an excessive amount of current.

FUSES (1/2)

In accordance with local legislation

or as a precautionary measure:

Obtain an emergency kit containing

a set of spare bulbs and fuses from

an approved Dealer.

5.24

ENG_UD23613_2

Fusibles (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

FUSES (2/2)

Some accessories are protected by

fuses located in the engine compart-

ment in fuse box C.

However, because of their reduced ac-

cessibility, we advise you to have your

fuses replaced by an approved Dealer.

Allocation of fuses

(the presence of certain fuses depends

on the vehicle equipment level)

1 Electronic parking brake;

2 Brake lights;

3 Automatic door locking;

4 Driver’s electric window;

5 Passenger compartment unit;

6 Direction indicator lights;

7 Navigation system;

8 Interior rear-view mirror;

9 Rear screen wiper;

10 and 11 Rear electric windows;

12 ABS/ESP;

13 Passenger electric window;

14 Windscreen washer;

15 Heated door mirrors;

16 Radio;

17 Luggage compartment accessories

socket;

18 Rear seat accessories socket;

19 Cigarette lighter.

battery

troubleshooting ............................... (up to the end of the DU)

5.25

ENG_UD25728_1

Batterie : dépannage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Battery

BATTERY: troubleshooting (1/2)

To avoid all risk of sparks:

– Ensure that any electrical consumers

(courtesy lights, etc.) are switched

off before disconnecting or recon-

necting the battery.

– When charging, stop the charger

before connecting or disconnecting

the battery.

– Do not place metal objects on the

battery to avoid creating a short cir-

cuit between the terminals.

– Always wait at least one minute after

the engine has been switched off

before disconnecting a battery.

– Make sure that you reconnect the

battery terminals after refitting.

Connecting a battery charger

The battery charger must be com-

patible with a battery with nominal

voltage of 12 volts.

Do not disconnect the battery when the

engine is running. Follow the instruc-

tions given by the manufacturer of

the battery charger you are using.

Special procedures may be

required to charge some

batteries. Contact your ap-

proved dealer.

Avoid all risk of sparks which may

cause an immediate explosion, and

charge the battery in a well-venti-

lated area. Risk of serious injury.

Handle the battery with care

as it contains sulphuric acid,

which must not come into

contact with eyes or skin. If

it does, wash the affected area with

plenty of cold water. If necessary,

consult a doctor.

Ensure that naked flames, red hot

objects and sparks do not come into

contact with the battery as there is a

risk of explosion.

The engine may be hot when car-

rying out operations in close prox-

imity. In addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

Deactivate the Stop and

Start function for any opera-

tion performed in the engine

compartment.

5.26

ENG_UD25728_1

Batterie : dépannage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Connect the positive cable A to the

support 1 on the (+) terminal, then to

the (+) terminal 2 of the battery sup-

plying the current.

Connect the negative cable B to the (–)

terminal 3 of the battery supplying the

current and then to the (–) terminal 4 of

the discharged battery.

Start the engine, and as soon as it starts

running, disconnect cables A and B in

reverse order ( 4 - 3 - 2 - 1 ).

Starting the vehicle using the

battery from another vehicle

If you have to use the battery from an-

other vehicle to start, obtain suitable

jump leads (with a large cross section)

from an approved dealer or, if you al-

ready have jump leads, ensure that

they are in perfect condition.

The two batteries must have an iden-

tical nominal voltage of 12 volts. The

battery supplying the current should

have a capacity (amp-hours, Ah) which

is at least the same as that of the dis-

charged battery.

Ensure that there is no risk of contact

between the two vehicles (risk of short

circuiting when the positive terminals

are connected) and that the discharged

battery is properly connected. Switch

off your vehicle ignition.

Start the engine of the vehicle supply-

ing the current and run it at an interme-

diate engine speed.

BATTERY: troubleshooting (2/2)

Check that there is no con-

tact between leads A and B

and that the positive lead A

is not touching any metal

parts on the vehicle supplying the

current.

Risk of injury and/or damage to the

vehicle.

1 4

RENAULT card

battery .............................................(up to the end of the DU)

RENAULT card battery ......................... (up to the end of the DU)

5.27

ENG_UD21014_4

Carte RENAULT : pile (X45 - H45 - X91 - B91 - K91 - X95 - B95 - D95 - E95 - K95 - J95 - R95 - L38 - X38 - X32 - B32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Operating faults

If the battery is too weak to ensure cor-

rect operation, you may start (insert the

RENAULT card in the card reader) and

lock/unlock the vehicle (refer to the in-

formation on “Locking/unlocking the

doors” in Section 1).

RENAULT card: battery

RENAULT CARD: battery

Replacing the battery

When the message “Low card battery”

appears on the instrument panel, re-

place the RENAULTcard battery, press

button 1, pulling on emergency key 2,

then unclip cover 3 using tab 4.

Remove the battery by pressing on one

side (movement A) and by lifting the

other (movement B) then replace it, en-

suring the polarity and model, shown

on cover 3 are respected.

Do not throw away your

used batteries; give them to

an organisation responsible

for collecting and recycling

batteries.

When refitting, proceed in the reverse

order, then press one of the buttons on

the card four times, close to the vehicle:

the next time the vehicle is started, the

message will disappear.

Note: it is not advisable to touch the

electronic circuit or contacts on the

RENAULT card when replacing the bat-

tery.

The batteries are available from approved Dealers, and their service life approxi-

mately two years. Check that there is no dye on the battery: risk of an incorrect

electrical contact.

Check that the cover is clipped shut.

fitting a radio ......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

speakers

location ...........................................(up to the end of the DU)

radio

fitting a radio ................................... (up to the end of the DU)

fitting a radio ......................................... (up to the end of the DU)

5.28

ENG_UD6351_1

Prééquipement radio (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Fitting a radio

FITTING A RADIO

If your vehicle is not fitted with an audio

system, one can be fitted and locations

have been provided for:

– the radio 1;

– tweeter speakers 2;

– bass speakers 3.

To install any equipment, please con-

sult an approved dealer.

Radio location 1

Unclip the blanking cover. The aerial, +

and – supply and speaker wire connec-

tions are located behind it.

– In all cases, it is very important to follow the manufacturer’s instructions care-

fully.

– The specifications of the brackets and wires (available from our network) vary

depending on the equipment level of your vehicle and the type of radio.

Consult an approved Dealer to find out the correct part number.

– No work may be carried out on the vehicle’s electrical or radio circuits, except

by approved dealers: an incorrectly connected system may result in damage

being caused to the electrical equipment and/or the components connected to

it.

accessories...........................................(up to the end of the DU)

5.29

ENG_UD12965_3

Accessoires (S65 - X84 - B84 - C84 - E84 - L84 - K84 - J84 - X85 - B85 - C85 - S85 - X91 - B91 - K91 - D91 - B65 - C65 - K85 - X95 - B95 - D95 - J95 - R95 - X33 - X38 - ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Accessories

ACCESSORIES

Use of transmission/

receiving devices

(telephones, CB

equipment etc.).

Telephones and CB equipment with

integrated aerials may cause inter-

ference to the original electronic

systems fitted to the vehicle: it is ad-

visable only to use equipment with

an external aerial.

Furthermore, we remind you of

the need to comply with the legis-

lation in force concerning the use

of such equipment.

Electrical and electronic

accessories

– Connect accessories

with a maximum power of

120 Watts only.

Fire hazard.

– No work may be carried out on

the vehicle’s electrical or radio

circuits, except by approved

Dealers: an incorrectly con-

nected system may result in

damage being caused to the

electrical equipment and/or the

components connected to it;

– if the vehicle is fitted with any

aftermarket electrical equip-

ment, make sure that the unit

is correctly protected by a fuse.

Establish the rating and position

of this fuse.

Before fitting an electrical or

electronic device (particu-

larly for transmitters/receiv-

ers: frequency bandwidth,

power level, position of the aerial

etc.), ensure that it is compatible

with your vehicle.

Contact an approved dealer for this

information.

Fitting after-market

accessories

If you wish to install acces-

sories on the vehicle: con-

sult an approved dealer.

Also, to ensure the correct opera-

tion of your vehicle, and to avoid

any risk to your safety, we recom-

mend that you use only specific ac-

cessories, designed for your vehi-

cle, which are the only accessories

for which the manufacturer will pro-

vide a warranty.

If you are using an anti-theft

device, only attach it to the

brake pedal.

wiper blades .........................................(up to the end of the DU)

wipers

blades ............................................. (up to the end of the DU)

5.30

ENG_UD21380_4

Balais d’essuie-vitres (X95 - B95 - D95 - L38 - X38 - X32 - B32 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Wipers (replacing blades)

WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES

Replacing windscreen wiper

blades 1

With the ignition on and engine

switched off, lower the windscreen

wiper stalk completely: they stop

slightly away from the bonnet.

Lift wiper arm 3, pull tab 2 (move-

ment A) and push the blade upwards.

To refit

Slide the blade along the arm until it

clips on. Make sure that the blade is

correctly locked in position. Return the

windscreen wiper stalk to the park po-

sition.

Check the condition of the wiper

blades. You are responsible for their

service life:

– clean the blades, windscreen and

rear screen regularly with soapy

water;

– do not use them when the wind-

screen or rear screen are dry;

– free them from the windscreen or

rear screen when they have not

been used for a long time.

Rear screen wiper blade 4

– Lift wiper arm 6;

– pivot blade 4 until some resistance is

met (movement C);

– depending on the vehicle, press

tab 5, then remove the blade by pull-

ing it (movement B).

To refit

To refit the wiper blade, proceed in re-

verse order to removal. Make sure that

the blade is correctly locked in position.

– In frosty weather, make

sure that the wiper blades

are not stuck by ice (to

avoid the risk of the motor

overheating).

– Check the condition of the wiper

blades.

Replace the wiper blades as soon

as they begin to lose efficiency

(approximately once a year).

Whilst changing the blade, take care

not to drop the arm onto the window

after it has been removed as this

may break the window.

towing

breakdown ...................................... (up to the end of the DU)

towing hitch...........................................(up to the end of the DU)

5.31

ENG_UD25737_1

Remorquage : dépannage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Towing

TOWING: breakdown (1/2)

Before towing, unlock the steering

column: with the clutch depressed,

engage first gear (lever in position N

or R for vehicles with automatic trans-

missions), insert the RENAULT card in

the card reader then press the engine

start button for two seconds.

Reposition the lever to neutral (posi-

tion N for vehicles fitted with an auto-

matic gearbox)

The steering column unlocks, the ve-

hicle’s accessory functions are pow-

ered, and you can use the vehicle lights

(brake lights, hazard warning lights,

etc.). At night, the vehicle must be lit.

Once you have finished towing, press

the engine start button twice (risk of

running down the battery).

The speed specified by current legis-

lation for towing must always be ob-

served. If your vehicle is the towing

vehicle, do not exceed the maximum

towing weight for your vehicle (refer to

the information on “Weights” in Section

6).

Towing a vehicle with an

automatic gearbox

With the engine switched off, the trans-

mission is no longer lubricated. It is

preferable to tow this type of vehicle on

a trailer or tow it with the front wheels

off the ground.

Under exceptional circumstances,

you may tow the vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground, only going for-

ward, with the gear lever in the N posi-

tion, and for a distance not exceeding

50 miles (80 km). If the lever is stuck in P,

even though you are de-

pressing the brake pedal,

the lever can be released

manually. To do this, insert a rigid

rod in the hole 2, press the rod and

unlocking button 1 located on the

lever simultaneously.

Do not remove the

RENAULT card from the

reader when the vehicle is

being towed.

5.32

ENG_UD25737_1

Remorquage : dépannage (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

TOWING: breakdown (2/2)

Only use the front 3 and rear 6 towing

points

(never use the drive shafts or any other

part of the vehicle). These towing points

may only be used for towing: never use

them for lifting the vehicle directly or in-

directly.

Access to towing points

Unclip cover 5 or 7 by sliding a flat tool

(or the key integrated in the RENAULT

card) under the cover.

Tighten towing hitch 4 fully: as much

as possible by hand at first, then finish

tightening it using the wheelbrace.

Use only towing hitch 4 and the wheel-

brace located under the luggage com-

partment carpet in the tool kit (please

refer to the information under “Tool kit”

in Section 5).

When the engine is

stopped, steering and brak-

ing assistance are not op-

erational.

Do not leave the tools unse-

cured inside the vehicle as

they may come loose under

braking.

– Use a rigid towing bar.

If a rope or cable is used

(where the law allows this),

the vehicle being towed

must be able to brake.

– A vehicle must not be towed if it is

not fit to be driven.

– Avoid accelerating or braking

suddenly when towing, as this

may result in damage being

caused to the vehicle.

– When towing a vehicle, it is ad-

visable not to exceed 30 mph

(50 km/h).

operating faults ..................................... (up to the end of the DU)

faults

operating faults ............................... (up to the end of the DU)

5.33

ENG_UD17369_3

Anomalies de fonctionnement (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Operating faults

OPERATING FAULTS (1/5)

The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact

an approved dealer as soon as possible.

Using the RENAULT card POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The RENAULT card does not lock or

unlock the doors.

Card battery is flat. Replace the battery. You can still lock/

unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the

information on “Locking/unlocking the

doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping

the engine” in Section 2).

Use of appliances operating on the

same frequency as the card (mobile

phone, etc.).

Stop using the equipment or use the in-

tegrated key (refer to the information on

“Locking/unlocking the doors” in Section 1).

Vehicle located in a high electromag-

netic radiation zone.

Vehicle battery flat.

Use the key integrated in the card (refer to

the information on “Locking/unlocking the

doors” in Section 1).

5.34

ENG_UD17369_3

Anomalies de fonctionnement (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Jaune Noir Noir texte

OPERATING FAULTS (2/5)

The starter is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The instrument panel indicator lights

are weak or fail to light up and the

starter does not turn.

Battery terminals not tight, battery

terminals disconnected or oxidised.

Retighten or reconnect the terminals, or

clean them if they are oxidised.

Discharged battery or not opera-

tional.

Connect another battery to the faulty bat-

tery. Refer to information on “Battery: trou-

bleshooting” in Section 5 or replace the bat-

tery if necessary.

Do not push the vehicle if the steering

column is locked.

The engine will not start. Starting conditions are not fulfilled. Refer to the information on “Starting/stop-

ping the engine” in Section 2.

The hands-free RENAULT card

does not work.

Insert the card in the card reader in order to

start the engine.

Refer to the information on “Starting/stop-

ping the engine” in Section 2.

The engine cannot be switched off. Card not detected. Insert the card in card reader.

Electronic fault. Press the starter button quickly five times.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

5.35

ENG_UD17369_3

Anomalies de fonctionnement (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

OPERATING FAULTS (3/5)

On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The steering column remains locked. Steering wheel locked. Move the steering wheel while pressing the

engine start button (refer to the information

on “Starting the engine” in Section 2).

Coolant boiling in the coolant reser-

voir.

Mechanical fault: damaged cylinder

head gasket.

Stop the engine.

Contact an approved dealer.

Smoke under the bonnet. Short-circuit or cooling system leak. Stop, switch off the ignition, stand away

from the vehicle and contact an approved

dealer.

The oil pressure warning light comes

on:

while cornering or braking The level is too low. Top up the engine oil level (refer to the in-

formation on “Engine oil level: topping up/

filling” in Section 4).

is slow to go out or remains lit

under acceleration

Loss of oil pressure. Stop the vehicle and contact an approved

dealer.

White smoke from the exhaust. This is not necessarily a fault. Smoke

may be caused by regeneration of the

particle filter.

Refer to the information on “Special fea-

tures of diesel versions” in Section 2.

5.36

ENG_UD17369_3

Anomalies de fonctionnement (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

Jaune Noir Noir texte

OPERATING FAULTS (4/5)

On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

Steering becomes heavy. Assistance overheating. Consult an approved dealer.

The engine overheats. The coolant

temperature indicator is in the warn-

ing zone and warning light ®

comes on.

Engine cooling fan not working. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and

contact an approved dealer.

Coolant leaks. Check the coolant reservoir: it should con-

tain fluid. If there is no coolant, consult an

approved dealer as soon as possible.

Vibrations. Tyres not inflated to correct pres-

sures, incorrectly balanced or dam-

aged.

Check the tyre pressures: if this is not the

problem, have them checked by an ap-

proved dealer.

Radiator: If there is a significant lack of coolant, remember that it must never be topped up using cold coolant while

the engine is very warm. After any procedure on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling

system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved

by our Technical Department may be used for this purpose.

Jaune Noir Noir texte

5.37

ENG_UD17369_3

Anomalies de fonctionnement (X95 - B95 - D95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

OPERATING FAULTS (5/5)

Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The wipers do not work. Wiper blades stuck. Free the blades before using the wipers.

Faulty electrical circuit. Consult an approved dealer.

The wiper does not stop. Faulty electrical controls. Consult an approved dealer.

Direction indicators flashing more

quickly.

Blown bulb. Front: contact an approved dealer.

Rear: replace the bulb.

The direction indicators do not work. Faulty electrical circuit. Consult an approved dealer.

The lights do not come on or go off. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.

Traces of condensation in the lights. Traces of condensation may be a nat-

ural phenomenon caused by varia-

tions in temperature.

In this situation, these traces soon dis-

appear when the lights are switched

on.

5.38

ENG_UD9525_5

Filler NU (X06 - C06 - S06 - X35 - L35 - X44 - C44 - G44 - X45 - H45 - X65 - L65 - S65 - X73 - B73 - X74 - B74 - K74 - X77 - J77 - F77 - R77 - X81 - J81 - X84 - B84 - C84 ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_5

6.1

ENG_UD26115_2

Sommaire 6 (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Section 6: Technical specifications

Vehicle identification plates ........................................................ 6.2

Engine identification plates ........................................................ 6.3

Dimensions .................................................................... 6.5

Engine specifications ............................................................. 6.8

Weights ....................................................................... 6.9

Towing weights ................................................................. 6.9

Replacement parts and repairs ..................................................... 6.10

Service sheets .................................................................. 6.11

Anti-corrosion check ............................................................. 6.17

6.2

ENG_UD25709_3

Plaques d’identification véhicule (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Vehicle identification plates

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATES

The information shown on the ve-

hicle identification plate should be

quoted on all correspondence or

orders.

The presence and location of the in-

formation depends on the vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate A

1 Vehicle type and chassis number.

Depending on the vehicle, this in-

formation is also given on mark-

ing B.

2 MMAC (Maximum permissible all-up

weight).

3 GTW (Gross train weight – vehicle

fully loaded, with trailer).

4 MMTA (Maximum permissible

weight) front axle.

5 Maximum permissible weight on rear

axle.

6 Technical specifications of vehicle.

7 Paint reference.

8 Equipment level.

9 Vehicle type.

10 Trim code.

11 Additional equipment specification.

12 Production number.

13 Interior trim code.

technical specifications .........................(up to the end of the DU)

vehicle identification plates ...................(up to the end of the DU)

6.3

ENG_UD25738_1

Plaques d’identification moteur (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Engine identification plates

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES (1/2)

Quote the information on the identi-

fication plate or label A in all corre-

spondence or when ordering parts.

(Location varies depending on engine)

1 Engine type.

2 Engine suffix.

3 Engine number.

1 2

6.4

ENG_UD25738_1

Plaques d’identification moteur (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Quote the information on the identi-

fication plate or label A in all corre-

spondence or when ordering parts.

(Location varies depending on engine)

1 Engine type.

2 Engine suffix.

3 Engine number.

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES (2/2)

1 2

technical specifications .........................(up to the end of the DU)

dimensions ...........................................(up to the end of the DU)

6.5

ENG_UD25739_1

Dimensions (en mètres) (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Dimensions

DIMENSIONS (in metres) (1/3)

Three door version

0.862 2.640 0.797 1.546

4.299

1.423*

1.547

1.785

* Unladen

6.6

ENG_UD25739_1

Dimensions (en mètres) (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Jaune Noir Noir texte

DIMENSIONS (in metres) (2/3)

0.862 2.641 0.792 1.546

4.292

1.471*

* Unladen

1.547

1.808

Five door version

Jaune Noir Noir texte

6.7

ENG_UD25739_1

Dimensions (en mètres) (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

DIMENSIONS (in metres) (3/3)

Sport tourer versions

0.862 2.703 0.994 1.546

4.558

1.461*

* Unladen

1.547

1.766

6.8

ENG_UD25740_1

Caractéristiques moteurs (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Engine specifications

Versions 1.2 TCe 1.4 TCe 1.6 16V 2.0 16V 2.0 T 1.5 dCi 1.9 dCi 2.0 dCi

Engine type

(see engine plate) H5F Turbo H4J Turbo K4M M4R F4R Turbo K9K F9Q M9R

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 197 1,395 1,598 1,998 1,998 1,461 1,870 1,995

Type of fuel

Octane Rating

It is essential that you use unleaded petrol of the octane rating

stated on the label inside the fuel filler flap.

If not available, for a limited time only, use unleaded fuel:

– with an octane rating of 91 for a label showing 95 or 98;

– with an octane rating of 87 for a label showing 91, 95 or 98.

Diesel

The label located in the fuel filler

flap indicates authorised fuels.

Spark plugs

Only use the spark plugs specified for your vehicle’s engine.

The type should be marked on a label affixed inside the engine

compartment. If it is not then contact your approved dealer.

Fitting spark plugs which are not to specification may damage

the engine.

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

technical specifications .........................(up to the end of the DU)

towing a caravan ..................................(up to the end of the DU)

towing weights ...................................... (up to the end of the DU)

weights .................................................(up to the end of the DU)

6.9

ENG_UD25668_1

Masses (en kg) (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Weights

Towing weights

WEIGHTS (in kg)

The weights indicated for a basic vehicle without options: they vary depending on the your vehicle’s equipment. Consult

your approved Dealer.

Five door Estate Three door

Maximum permissible all-up weight (MMAC)

Total train weight (MTR)

Weights are indicated on the vehicle identification plate (refer to

the information on “Vehicle identification plates” in Section 6)

Braked trailer weight* found by calculating: MTR - MMAC

Unbraked trailer weight* 635

Permissible nose weight* 75

Permissible load on the roof with the carrying device 80 kg (including the carrying device) Prohibited

* Towing weight (towing a caravan, boat, etc.)

Towing is prohibited when the calculation MTR (Total train weight) - MMAC (Maximum permissible all-up weight) is zero.

– It is important to comply with the towing weights, governed by local legislation in each country and, in particular, laid down in

the Road Traffic Regulations. Contact an approved Dealer about any towing equipment.

– When towing, under no circumstances may the total train weight (vehicle + trailer) be exceeded. However the following is

permitted:

– the Maximum permissible weight at the rear may be exceeded by no more than 15%,

– the maximum permissible all-up weight may be exceeded by no more than 10% or 100 kg (whichever occurs first).

In either case, the maximum speed of the vehicle and trailer must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressures must

be increased by 0.2 bar (3 PSI).

– The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. We recommend that the maximum load be reduced by 10%

at an altitude of 1,000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1,000 metres thereafter.

Load transfer Sport Tourer versions

If the Maximum Authorised Mass of the vehicle has not been reached, up to 200 kg can be transferred to the braked trailer, within

the limits of the Gross Train Weight.

technical specifications .........................(up to the end of the DU)

replacement parts .................................(up to the end of the DU)

6.10

ENG_UD7339_1

Pièces de rechange et réparations (X76 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Replacement parts and repairs

Original parts are based on strict specifications and are subject to highly-specialised tests. Therefore, they are of at least the same

level of quality as the parts fitted originally.

If you always fit genuine replacement parts to your vehicle, you will ensure that it performs well. Furthermore, repairs carried out

within the manufacturer’s Network using original parts are guaranteed according to the conditions set out on the reverse of the

repair order.

REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS

service sheets.......................................(up to the end of the DU)

maintenance:

mechanical ...................................... (up to the end of the DU)

maintenance:

mileage before service .................... (up to the end of the DU)

6.11

ENG_UD10910_1

Justificatif d’entretien (X06 - X35 - X44 - X45 - X65 - X73 - X81 - X84 - X85 - X90 - X70 - X76 - X83 - X61 - X24 - X77 ph2 - L38 - L43 - L47 - X61 BUp - X33 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Service sheets

SERVICE SHEETS (1/6)

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

VIN: ..................................................................................

6.12

ENG_UD10910_1

Justificatif d’entretien (X06 - X35 - X44 - X45 - X65 - X73 - X81 - X84 - X85 - X90 - X70 - X76 - X83 - X61 - X24 - X77 ph2 - L38 - L43 - L47 - X61 BUp - X33 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Jaune Noir Noir texte

SERVICE SHEETS (2/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Jaune Noir Noir texte

6.13

ENG_UD10910_1

Justificatif d’entretien (X06 - X35 - X44 - X45 - X65 - X73 - X81 - X84 - X85 - X90 - X70 - X76 - X83 - X61 - X24 - X77 ph2 - L38 - L43 - L47 - X61 BUp - X33 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

SERVICE SHEETS (3/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

6.14

ENG_UD10910_1

Justificatif d’entretien (X06 - X35 - X44 - X45 - X65 - X73 - X81 - X84 - X85 - X90 - X70 - X76 - X83 - X61 - X24 - X77 ph2 - L38 - L43 - L47 - X61 BUp - X33 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Jaune Noir Noir texte

SERVICE SHEETS (4/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Jaune Noir Noir texte

6.15

ENG_UD10910_1

Justificatif d’entretien (X06 - X35 - X44 - X45 - X65 - X73 - X81 - X84 - X85 - X90 - X70 - X76 - X83 - X61 - X24 - X77 ph2 - L38 - L43 - L47 - X61 BUp - X33 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

SERVICE SHEETS (5/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

6.16

ENG_UD10910_1

Justificatif d’entretien (X06 - X35 - X44 - X45 - X65 - X73 - X81 - X84 - X85 - X90 - X70 - X76 - X83 - X61 - X24 - X77 ph2 - L38 - L43 - L47 - X61 BUp - X33 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

SERVICE SHEETS (6/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

Date: Miles (km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service    □

.......................................  □

Anticorrosion check:

OK□  NotOK*□

*See specific page

anti-corrosion check .............................(up to the end of the DU)

6.17

ENG_UD10976_1

Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X84 - X85 - X95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Anticorrosion check

ANTICORROSION CHECK (1/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

6.18

ENG_UD10976_1

Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X84 - X85 - X95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Jaune Noir Noir texte

ANTICORROSION CHECK (2/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Jaune Noir Noir texte

6.19

ENG_UD10976_1

Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X84 - X85 - X95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

ANTICORROSION CHECK (3/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

6.20

ENG_UD10976_1

Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X84 - X85 - X95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

Jaune Noir Noir texte

ANTICORROSION CHECK (4/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Jaune Noir Noir texte

6.21

ENG_UD10976_1

Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X84 - X85 - X95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

ANTICORROSION CHECK (5/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

6.22

ENG_UD10976_1

Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X84 - X85 - X95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_6

ANTICORROSION CHECK (6/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out: Stamp

Date of repair:

7.1

FRA_UD26116_2

Index (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_7

AlphAbeticAl index (1/5)

ABS ..............................................................1.57, 2.22 → 2.25

access to the rear seats .................................................... 1.21

accessories........................................................................ 5.29

accessories socket ............................................................ 3.21

additional methods of restraint .....................1.25 → 1.28, 1.31

side protection ............................................................. 1.30

to the front seat belts .......................................1.25 → 1.28

to the rear seat belts ........................................1.25 → 1.29

adjusting your driving position ....................... 1.15 – 1.16, 1.22

advice on antipollution ...........................................2.15 → 2.17

air bag...........................................................1.25 → 1.31, 1.57

activating the front passenger air bags ........................ 1.50

deactivating the front passenger air bags .................... 1.48

air conditioning ........................................................3.4 → 3.11

air vents ...................................................................... 3.2 – 3.3

anti-corrosion check ..............................................6.17 → 6.22

anti-corrosion protection .................................................... 4.13

anti-lock braking system: ABS ...............................2.22 → 2.25

antipollution

advice .......................................................................... 2.15

armrest:

front .............................................................................. 3.18

ashtray ............................................................................... 3.21

ASR (traction control) ............................................2.22 → 2.25

audible and visual signals.................................................. 1.75

automatic gearbox (use) ........................................2.39 → 2.41

automatic gearbox selector lever...........................2.39 → 2.41

battery....................................................................... 1.58, 4.12

troubleshooting ................................................. 5.25 – 5.26

bonnet.................................................................................. 4.2

brake fluid ............................................................................ 4.9

bulbs

changing ..........................................................5.12 → 5.20

catalytic converter..................................................... 2.9 – 2.10

central door locking ........................................1.8, 1.12 → 1.14

changing a bulb .....................................................5.12 → 5.20

changing a wheel........................................................ 5.7 – 5.8

changing gear ...............................................2.11, 2.39 → 2.41

child restraint/seat .............................1.32 – 1.33, 1.35 → 1.50

child safety.........1.2, 1.6, 1.11, 1.32 – 1.33, 1.35 → 1.50, 3.12

child seats..........................................1.32 – 1.33, 1.35 → 1.47

children ...................................... 1.10 – 1.11, 1.32 – 1.33, 1.33

children (safety) .......................................... 1.2, 1.6, 1.11, 3.12

cigar lighter ........................................................................ 3.21

cleaning:

inside the vehicle .............................................. 4.15 – 4.16

clock .................................................................................. 1.73

closing the doors ...................................................1.10 → 1.13

control instruments ................................................1.56 → 1.63

controls ..................................................................1.52 → 1.55

coolant ........................................................................ 1.60, 4.8

courtesy light ...................................... 3.15 – 3.16, 5.21 – 5.22

courtesy mirrors ................................................................. 3.16

cruise control ................................................1.57, 2.28 → 2.34

cruise control-speed limiter....................................2.28 → 2.34

customised vehicle settings .............................................. 1.72

customising the vehicle settings ....................................... 1.72

dashboard..............................................................1.52 → 1.55

daytime running lights........................................................ 1.76

deadlocking the doors ......................................................... 1.8

dimensions ................................................................6.5 → 6.7

dipstick................................................................................. 4.4

display ...................................................................1.56 → 1.61

doors.............................................................. 1.10 – 1.11, 1.14

doors/tailgate .......................................... 1.8, 1.10 – 1.11, 1.14

driver’s position .....................................................1.52 → 1.59

7.2

FRA_UD26116_2

Index (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_7

Jaune Noir Noir texte

AlphAbeticAl index (2/5)

driving ......... 2.2 – 2.4, 2.9 → 2.17, 2.19 → 2.25, 2.28 → 2.37,

2.39 → 2.41

driving position

settings ............................................................1.22 → 1.24

electric beam height adjustment ........................................ 1.80

electric windows ....................................................3.12 → 3.14

electronic parking brake ........................................2.12 → 2.14

Electronic Stability Program: ESP .........................2.22 → 2.25

emergency brake assist.........................................2.22 → 2.25

emergency braking ................................................2.22 → 2.25

emergency key ........................................................... 1.2 – 1.3

emergency spare wheel ............................................... 5.2, 5.6

engine oil ..........................................................1.58, 4.3 → 4.7

engine oil capacity .....................................................4.5 → 4.7

engine oil level ...........................................................4.3 → 4.7

engine start/stop button .............................................2.3 → 2.5

environment ....................................................................... 2.18

ESP: Electronic Stability Program .........................2.22 → 2.25

external temperature ......................................................... 1.73

faults

operating faults ................................................5.33 → 5.37

filter

air filter ......................................................................... 4.10

diesel filter .................................................................... 4.10

oil filter ......................................................... 4.6 – 4.7, 4.10

particle filter ................................................................. 1.57

passenger compartment filter ...................................... 4.10

fitting a radio ...................................................................... 5.28

fittings ....................................................................3.17 → 3.20

front passenger air bag deactivation ................................. 1.48

front seat

driver’s position memory .............................................. 1.20

front seat adjustment .............................................. 1.17 – 1.18

front seats

adjustment ..........................1.15, 1.17 – 1.18, 1.22 → 1.24

with electric controls .................................................... 1.19

with manual controls .................................................... 1.17

fuel

advice on fuel economy ............................................... 2.15

capacity ........................................................................ 1.84

filling ........................................................1.56, 1.84 → 1.86

grade ................................................................1.84 → 1.86

fuel economy .........................................................2.15 → 2.17

fuel filler cap ..........................................................1.84 → 1.86

fuel level ............................................................................ 1.60

fuel tank

capacity ............................................................1.84 → 1.86

fuel tank capacity ...................................................1.84 → 1.86

fuses ....................................................................... 5.23 – 5.24

gear lever........................................................................... 2.11

glove box ........................................................................... 3.19

handbrake................................................................. 1.56, 2.11

hands-free telephone integrated control ............................ 3.36

hazard warning lights signal ................................... 1.75 – 1.76

headlight beam adjustment ............................................... 1.80

headlight flashers .............................................................. 1.75

headlight washer ............................................................... 1.82

headrest.................................................................. 1.15 – 1.16

heating and air conditioning system .................................. 3.11

heating system ........................................................3.4 → 3.10

hill start ..................................................................2.23 → 2.25

Hill Start Assistance (HSA) ................................................ 2.23

horn ................................................................................... 1.75

Jaune Noir Noir texte

7.3

FRA_UD26116_2

Index (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_7

AlphAbeticAl index (3/5)

horn:

flash ............................................................................. 1.75

sounding the horn ........................................................ 1.75

hubcap tool .......................................................................... 5.6

indicators .............................................1.56, 1.75, 5.12 → 5.14

indicators:

direction indicators .............................................. 1.75, 5.15

exterior temperature indicator ...................................... 1.73

instrument panel ..............................................1.56 → 1.63

instrument panel ...........................................1.56 → 1.71, 1.76

instrument panel messages...................................1.62 → 1.71

interior trim

maintenance ..................................................... 4.15 – 4.16

jack ...................................................................................... 5.6

levels:

brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.9

coolant .................................................................. 1.60, 4.8

fuel ............................................................................... 1.60

windscreen washer reservoir ....................................... 4.10

lifting the vehicle

changing a wheel .................................................. 5.7 – 5.8

lighting:

exterior .............................................................1.76 → 1.79

instrument panel .......................................................... 1.76

interior ........................................... 3.15 – 3.16, 5.21 – 5.22

lights

adjustment ................................................................... 1.80

changing bulbs .................................................5.12 → 5.14

front ..................................................................5.12 → 5.14

mobile directional ......................................................... 1.78

lights:

adjusting ...................................................................... 1.80

brake lights .................................................................. 5.15

dipped beam headlights .................1.56, 1.76, 5.12 → 5.14

direction indicators .........................1.56, 1.75, 5.12 → 5.15

fog lights .................................................... 1.56, 1.79, 5.15

hazard warning ............................................................ 1.75

main beam headlights ....................1.56, 1.78, 5.12 → 5.14

number plate lights ...................................................... 5.20

reversing lights ............................................................. 5.15

side lights ............................................................ 1.76, 5.15

locking the doors ............................................1.2 → 1.11, 1.14

luggage compartment cover ................................... 3.27 – 3.28

luggage retaining net .............................................. 3.33 – 3.34

maintenance:

bodywork .......................................................... 4.13 – 4.14

interior trim ........................................................ 4.15 – 4.16

mechanical ................................................4.2, 6.11 → 6.16

mileage before service .....................................6.11 → 6.16

map reading lights .................................................. 3.15 – 3.16

menu for customising the vehicle settings ......................... 1.72

methods of restraint in addition to the front seat belts ..............

1.25 → 1.28

methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...1.25 → 1.31

multimedia equipment ....................................................... 3.36

navigation .......................................................................... 3.36

navigation system .............................................................. 3.36

oil change ..................................................................4.3 → 4.7

opening the doors ..................................................1.10 → 1.13

operating faults ................................ 1.56 → 1.59, 5.33 → 5.37

7.4

FRA_UD26116_2

Index (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_7

Jaune Noir Noir texte

AlphAbeticAl index (4/5)

paintwork

maintenance ..................................................... 4.13 – 4.14

parking distance control.........................................2.35 → 2.37

power-assisted steering..................................................... 1.51

pretensioners ..................................................................... 1.25

puncture..............................................................5.2, 5.6 → 5.8

radio................................................................................... 3.36

fitting a radio ................................................................ 5.28

rear bench seat......................................................3.22 → 3.24

rear parcel shelf .....................................................3.26 → 3.28

rear screen de-icing/demisting ..................................... 3.5, 3.9

rear seats

functions ..........................................................3.22 → 3.24

rear view mirrors ................................................................ 1.74

RENAULT ANTI-INTRUDER DEVICE (RAID) ................... 1.14

RENAULT card

battery .......................................................................... 5.27

use .......................................................................1.2 → 1.9

RENAULT card battery ...................................................... 5.27

replacement parts .............................................................. 6.10

reverse gear

selecting ..................................................2.11, 2.39 → 2.41

reversing sensor ....................................................2.35 → 2.37

roof bars ............................................................................ 3.35

roof rack

roof bars ....................................................................... 3.35

running in ............................................................................. 2.2

screen wash/wipe .............................................................. 1.83

seat belt pretensioners ..........................................1.25 → 1.28

front seat belt ...................................................1.25 → 1.28

seat belts ..................................1.22 → 1.28, 1.30 – 1.31, 1.58

see-me-home lighting ............................................... 1.78, 1.80

service sheets........................................................6.11 → 6.16

side indicator lights

changing bulbs ............................................................. 5.20

side protection devices ...................................................... 1.30

signals and lights ...................................................1.76 → 1.80

speakers

location ........................................................................ 5.28

special features of diesel versions..................................... 2.10

special features of petrol vehicles ....................................... 2.9

speed limiter .................................................1.57, 2.28 → 2.30

starting the engine ...................................................... 2.3 – 2.4

steering wheel

adjustment ................................................................... 1.51

stopping the engine ............................................................. 2.5

storage compartment.............................................3.17 → 3.20

storage compartments .....................3.17 → 3.20, 3.29 → 3.31

storing the driver’s seat position ........................................ 1.20

sun visor ............................................................................ 3.16

sunroof...................................................................3.12 → 3.14

switching on the vehicle ignition .......................................... 2.4

tailgate ...........................3.25 – 3.26, 3.29 → 3.31, 3.33 – 3.34

tanks and reservoirs

brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.9

coolant ........................................................................... 4.8

tanks and reservoirs:

windscreen washer ...................................................... 4.10

technical specifications ............................6.3 → 6.7, 6.9 – 6.10

telephone ........................................................................... 3.36

temperature regulation ............................................3.6 → 3.10

tool kit .................................................................................. 5.6

towing

breakdown ........................................................ 5.31 – 5.32

towing equipment ......................................................... 3.32

Jaune Noir Noir texte

7.5

FRA_UD26116_2

Index (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_7

AlphAbeticAl index (5/5)

towing a caravan ........................................................ 3.32, 6.9

towing equipment

fitting ............................................................................ 3.32

towing hitch............................................................. 5.31 – 5.32

towing rings ................................................... 1.35 – 1.36, 3.32

towing weights ..................................................................... 6.9

traction control: ASR ..............................................2.22 → 2.25

transporting children ..........................1.32 – 1.33, 1.35 → 1.50

transporting objects

in the luggage compartment ............................3.32 → 3.34

luggage net ....................................................... 3.33 – 3.34

trims ..................................................................................... 5.6

trip computer and warning system...1.56 → 1.59, 1.62 → 1.71

tyre inflation kit...........................................................5.3 → 5.5

tyre pressure........................................2.19 → 2.21, 4.11, 5.10

tyre pressure monitor.............................................2.19 → 2.21

tyre pressures .................................................................... 4.11

tyres .......................................... 2.19 → 2.21, 4.11, 5.9 → 5.11

unlocking the doors ................................................ 1.12 – 1.13

variable power-assisted steering ....................................... 1.57

vehicle identification plates ......................................... 6.3 – 6.4

ventilation ................................................................3.4 → 3.10

warning buzzer ....................................... 1.10, 1.58, 1.75, 1.78

warning lights...................................1.56 → 1.59, 1.62 → 1.71

washing .................................................................. 4.13 – 4.14

weights ................................................................................ 6.9

wheelbrace .......................................................................... 5.6

wheels (safety) ........................................................5.9 → 5.11

windscreen de-icing/demisting ..................................... 3.5, 3.9

windscreen washer .......................................1.81 → 1.83, 4.10

windscreen washer/wiper ....................................... 1.81 – 1.82

wiper blades ...................................................................... 5.30

wipers ....................................................................1.81 → 1.83

blades .......................................................................... 5.30

FRA_UD26116_2

Index (X95 - B95 - D95 - K95 - Renault)ENG_NU_966-1_BDK95_Renault_7

à999105709Rêúòä BU

RENAULT S.A.S. SOCIÉTÉ PAR ACTIONS SIMPLIFIÉE AU CAPITAL DE 533 941 113 € / 13-15, QUAI LE GALLO

92100 BOULOGNE-BILLANCOURT R.C.S. NANTERRE 780 129 987 — SIRET 780 129 987 03591 / TÉL. : 0810 40 50 60

NU 966-1 – 99 91 057 09R – 11/2011 – Edition anglaise

( www.e-guide.renault.com )

Renault Megane Coupe Drivers Handbook

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation